IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hi and welcome to PowerPoint 2011
Essential Training. I am David Rivers.
| | 00:08 | If you need to produce stunning
presentations that keep your audiences engaged,
| | 00:13 | PowerPoint 2011 is the right program for you.
| | 00:16 | We will take a tour of the new and
improved fluent user interface, focusing
| | 00:21 | mainly on the Ribbon to get you
feeling comfortable in your new surroundings.
| | 00:26 | Then it's on to the basics of creating
presentations from scratch, whether they
| | 00:29 | be blank presentations or
preformatted presentations, using one of the many
| | 00:34 | templates available to you,
here in PowerPoint 2011.
| | 00:36 | We will get into more complex
functionality when we start customizing the layout
| | 00:43 | and design of your presentation.
| | 00:45 | This will involve extensive work with text.
| | 00:48 | There is tables, charts,
media, and special effects.
| | 00:57 | Of course, presentations are usually
made to be shared, so we will discover and
| | 01:04 | discuss ways to show and share
your presentations with others.
| | 01:08 | This will include exploring the various
formats you can save your presentations
| | 01:12 | to, as well as options for
broadcasting a presentation.
| | 01:16 | So with so many topics to
cover, let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding PowerPoint| 00:00 | Just before we begin to explore the
many features and functions of PowerPoint
| | 00:04 | 2011, it might be a good idea to
investigate what PowerPoint is, and the types of
| | 00:09 | files you might create with it.
| | 00:12 | If you are already familiar with
PowerPoint - maybe you have used previous
| | 00:14 | versions - you can probably skip this
movie; otherwise, in simple terms Microsoft
| | 00:19 | PowerPoint is a presentations
application, and like the definition implies, this
| | 00:24 | allows you to create professional
quality presentations or slideshows right
| | 00:29 | from your own computer.
| | 00:31 | Remember, those 35-millimeter slides
you'd slip into a projector wheel?
| | 00:35 | Well, PowerPoint replaces that, and with
PowerPoint 2011, you will find you are able to
| | 00:40 | easily communicate your message in a
variety of presentation formats, with little
| | 00:45 | to no experience in
slideshow or graphic design.
| | 00:48 | Now you can create presentations for
communicating the status on a project, or
| | 00:54 | maybe you want to pitch a product or
maybe you just want to show a bunch of
| | 00:58 | photos like you used to with those 35-
millimeter slides; maybe it's to train
| | 01:02 | people. The list goes on.
| | 01:04 | In this course, you will find it's
broken up into several chapters, and to give
| | 01:08 | you some experience with a variety of
presentations, we will work with a number
| | 01:12 | of different types of presentations
in the various chapters as we cover the
| | 01:16 | individual tools, features,
and functions of PowerPoint 2011.
| | 01:20 | So this will include a business
presentation for relaying company
| | 01:24 | information, for example.
| | 01:25 | You will also find that we are going
to be showing photos using a kind of a
| | 01:30 | photo gallery type presentation, and
we are also going to work with what we
| | 01:36 | would call a kiosk-style
presentation, one that's somewhat self-running.
| | 01:41 | So, for example, it might be a quiz
where people are interactive with the
| | 01:45 | various slides, answering
questions as the slides go by.
| | 01:49 | In the end, you will have worked with
several different types of presentations
| | 01:53 | while learning about the various
features and functions of PowerPoint 2011.
| | 01:58 | So now that you know a little more
about what you can create with PowerPoint,
| | 02:01 | it's time to start doing it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you are a premium subscriber
with lynda.com, you will have access to
| | 00:04 | the exercise files.
| | 00:05 | The exercise files allow you to follow
along with me step-by-step, as we move
| | 00:09 | through the various chapters in this title.
| | 00:12 | If you do plan on using them, I highly
recommend placing them in a convenient
| | 00:16 | location, such as your desktop, and when
you double-click the folder to open it
| | 00:20 | up, you will notice a number of subfolders,
representing each of the chapters in this title.
| | 00:25 | Then open up one of those folders, and
you will notice additional subfolders for
| | 00:29 | each of the movies in the chapter.
| | 00:32 | When you take a look inside, you will
find the actual file or presentation we
| | 00:36 | will be working with as we go
through that particular movie.
| | 00:40 | Now if you don't have the
exercise files, don't worry about it;
| | 00:43 | you can still learn lots by
simply sitting back and watching.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Navigating the User InterfaceExploring the Presentation gallery| 00:01 | When you are ready to start using
PowerPoint, there are a number of different
| | 00:04 | ways to launch the application.
| | 00:07 | One option is to go down to the Dock.
| | 00:09 | The Dock will automatically display each
of the applications in the Office suite.
| | 00:14 | They were placed there
during the actual installation.
| | 00:18 | So for PowerPoint, you will look for
the big orange p. Click once and you have
| | 00:21 | launched the application.
| | 00:22 | There are other ways though, if you don't
like to have too many items on your Dock.
| | 00:27 | The option I like to use is Spotlight.
Click the magnifying glass in the very
| | 00:32 | top right-hand corner of your
screen and start to type PowerPoint.
| | 00:36 | You might only need to type po, for
example, and there you see it, the
| | 00:40 | top hit, PowerPoint.
| | 00:42 | If you need to go down to
Applications, you might find it there as well.
| | 00:45 | Of course, the long way is to click Go
from Finder, select Applications and then
| | 00:52 | look for Microsoft Office 2011.
| | 00:54 | You will see a little arrow next to it
to expand that and display the various
| | 00:58 | applications, including Microsoft PowerPoint.
| | 01:01 | There it is, the app. Double-click,
and you will launch PowerPoint.
| | 01:05 | So, however you would like to do it, go
ahead and do it, and the first thing you
| | 01:08 | will see is the Project Gallery.
| | 01:09 | A Project Gallery that you see
might look a little different from mine.
| | 01:16 | It all depends on how you used it,
if you have used it, to this point.
| | 01:20 | For example, you will see a slider
down at the bottom that allows you to
| | 01:23 | increase or decrease the size of the
thumbnails that appear for the various
| | 01:28 | presentation templates.
| | 01:29 | So the presentation gallery that you are
looking at will help you to get started
| | 01:33 | creating a brand-new presentation,
but it can also be used to access recent
| | 01:38 | presentations that you have worked on.
| | 01:40 | So, for example, if you want to look
at all of your recent presentations,
| | 01:43 | you'll see a number next to it -
| | 01:44 | in my case I see a nine - and I
can access all nine of those recent
| | 01:48 | presentations to go back to them
quickly, or I could just look at the ones I
| | 01:52 | have worked with today,
yesterday, in the past week.
| | 01:55 | Each time you click one of these, you
are going to see thumbnail representations
| | 01:58 | of the various presentations, and you
can simply select one to view information
| | 02:04 | about it on the right-hand pane.
| | 02:05 | Now the right-hand pane does display
information like when it was created, last
| | 02:09 | opened, and so on, where it's located, the size.
| | 02:13 | If you don't like seeing that information,
you want more room for the thumbnails
| | 02:17 | you can open or close this right pane
by clicking the button at the very top.
| | 02:21 | And there it goes. Now we've got
more room to see our thumbnails.
| | 02:25 | If you want it back, click
the same button; it is a toggle.
| | 02:28 | So at this point you can select something.
| | 02:30 | If you want to go back to your
templates, you can click Presentations, scroll
| | 02:35 | through the various templates to choose from.
| | 02:37 | If you are connected to the Internet,
you can go to online templates as well.
| | 02:40 | Once you have found something, such as a
pitch book let's say, you can go to the
| | 02:45 | right-hand pane now and see
that there are six sample slides.
| | 02:48 | We are at one of six. And you can
navigate through them. And if you don't like
| | 02:52 | the color scheme, you can go down and
change the color scheme before you create
| | 02:55 | this new presentation,
| | 02:56 | If you want something like Advantage and
you want to change the fonts that are used,
| | 03:03 | you can see the font set that's being used.
| | 03:05 | You will see little samples of those fonts.
| | 03:07 | Let's say we want to go
to Arial or Cambria maybe.
| | 03:12 | And then you can change the slide
size as well. If you are on a wide screen
| | 03:15 | and you are going to be presenting
in front of a large crowd, using a
| | 03:17 | projector, let's say,
| | 03:19 | you might want to change this to Wide
Screen to match her own screen, and you
| | 03:23 | will see a thumbnail representation
using the new settings up there, and then
| | 03:28 | all you have to do is
click Choose to start creating.
| | 03:30 | Now just before we do that though,
you will notice at the very bottom here
| | 03:34 | there is a check box.
| | 03:36 | If you don't like seeing the
PowerPoint presentation gallery every time you
| | 03:40 | launch PowerPoint, you can choose not
to see this when opening PowerPoint, by
| | 03:44 | clicking the check box, and all that
will happen now when you launch PowerPoint
| | 03:48 | is you will be presented
with a new blank presentation.
| | 03:51 | That means you will be starting from scratch.
| | 03:53 | You can go to Open existing presentations.
| | 03:56 | You can create new ones using the same
templates. And you can always turn this back on.
| | 04:00 | We will do that a little bit later
when we talk about the presentation
| | 04:04 | gallery in another movie.
| | 04:06 | So once you've got your
selections made, you click Choose.
| | 04:10 | This launches PowerPoint with your
selected template, and you are ready to start
| | 04:14 | creating your very first presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding the Ribbon interface| 00:00 | If you're brand-new to PowerPoint or if
you've migrated from earlier versions of
| | 00:04 | PowerPoint on the Mac to PowerPoint
2011, you're going to notice an extensive
| | 00:09 | change to the user interface.
| | 00:11 | It's important we get comfortable in
our surroundings, so we're going to explore
| | 00:14 | the new Fluent user interface,
including the new Ribbon. And to do that, we're
| | 00:19 | going to open up an existing presentation.
| | 00:21 | So, let's start at the very top of our screen.
| | 00:23 | At the very top we still have what we
call the menu bar, with menu items like
| | 00:27 | File, Edit, View, all the way across
to Help. And clicking these headings will
| | 00:31 | display a pop-up menu. For example, if
we click File, we're going to see File
| | 00:35 | commands, including one for opening.
| | 00:38 | Notice that keyboard shortcuts
appear next to many of these commands.
| | 00:42 | So in this case Command+O would accomplish the
same thing as clicking Open, so let's do that.
| | 00:48 | This displays a file named NewHire.pptx.
| | 00:51 | That's the extension for
PowerPoint presentations.
| | 00:54 | So, we'll select it.
| | 00:55 | You'll see a thumbnail representation of
the first slide. Just to confirm that's
| | 01:00 | what you're looking for, click Open,
and you will have opened up the
| | 01:04 | presentation. And now we're going to
take that tour of the user interface.
| | 01:08 | So, we already know that we have the
menu bar across the top of our screen.
| | 01:13 | This displays all of the commands.
| | 01:15 | So they are all hidden in these
menus. But there are other options for
| | 01:18 | accessing those commands.
| | 01:19 | So, we're going to move down to the toolbar.
| | 01:22 | Now the toolbar does have shortcut
buttons for creating a new presentation or
| | 01:26 | creating a new one from a template.
| | 01:28 | There is a shortcut for opening a
presentation, the icon of the folder opening
| | 01:32 | up, clicking that will take us to that open
window where we can select the file to open.
| | 01:37 | We can save, print.
| | 01:39 | You'll see some other ones here
for editing, cut, copy and paste; for
| | 01:42 | example, undo and redo.
| | 01:43 | These are standard buttons
that appear on the toolbar.
| | 01:46 | We also have a Search field over here
on the right-hand side of our toolbar.
| | 01:51 | What's really brand-new though to
PowerPoint 2011 is the Ribbon that appears
| | 01:56 | just below the toolbar.
| | 01:57 | With Home selected, you're going to see
many of the more commonly used commands
| | 02:01 | when working on a presentation,
| | 02:03 | so for example, if we wanted to add
new slides, change the layout or add
| | 02:07 | sections or remove sections.
| | 02:10 | When we select something on a slide,
just click anywhere on the first slide such
| | 02:14 | as the logo for Two Trees Olive Oil Company,
| | 02:17 | you'll notice something different happens now.
| | 02:20 | While the Home tab is still
selected but Format Picture appears.
| | 02:23 | So we have a number of formatting
options that appear for inserting text and
| | 02:27 | pictures, and so on.
| | 02:29 | If we click on some text inside our
slide, you can see it just turns into
| | 02:33 | format. And now all of our Format
commands are available to us for changing
| | 02:36 | text, changing the font, the font size,
and the appearance, such as bold, italics
| | 02:42 | and underlining and the font
color and adding shadows, and so on.
| | 02:46 | You also have the ability to change
things like the alignment of our text.
| | 02:51 | All of these options under
Paragraph appear available to us because
| | 02:55 | we've selected a textbox.
| | 02:57 | So, it's context-sensitive, meaning
depending on what you select by clicking,
| | 03:01 | you're going to see different options
available to you, and the Ribbon interface
| | 03:05 | has many more tabs. So if you want to
go to Themes, for example, and choose a
| | 03:08 | different theme for your
presentation, you could do that.
| | 03:11 | Then you'll see a Tables tab for
all the tables-related commands.
| | 03:14 | They're all located in
one easy-to-find location.
| | 03:17 | This is designed to save you some time,
so you're actually doing more work and
| | 03:21 | spending less time searching for commands.
| | 03:23 | There's Charts, SmarArt. Want to
work with transitions in your slides?
| | 03:27 | You have a Transition tab on the
Ribbon, and all of your transition
| | 03:31 | options appear here, including
some previews and some options for
| | 03:35 | adjusting those transitions.
| | 03:37 | Same thing goes for Animations, if
you're working with objects on the slide,
| | 03:40 | Slide Show tab for your slideshow,
timings and rehearsing and action
| | 03:46 | settings, and so on.
| | 03:47 | And then we have a Review tab, where
you'll see all kinds of cool things, like
| | 03:51 | creating these sticky notes, comparing
presentations, adjusting permissions, even
| | 03:56 | sharing your presentation by mail
if you wanted to, as an attachment.
| | 04:00 | If you just click off the edge of
your slide and nothing is selected,
| | 04:04 | you'll see certain objects are grayed out.
| | 04:06 | They're not available to you. Some disappear.
| | 04:09 | If we go back to the Home tab, you can
see we've got all of our standard tools
| | 04:13 | now available to us.
| | 04:14 | It is context-sensitive.
| | 04:16 | Down on the left-hand side, your
Navigation pane for moving from
| | 04:19 | slide to slide. You can use this.
| | 04:21 | You can scroll through your
presentation using the scrollbar.
| | 04:26 | If you don't want to actually view
this pane, there is a close button that
| | 04:29 | allows you get it out of the way, so you
can zoom in on your slide and have more
| | 04:34 | room for working on your slide. In the
bottom right-hand corner is a slider, a
| | 04:37 | zoom slider that's going to
allow you to zoom into your slides.
| | 04:40 | You can see, for me at least, it's set
to 50%. We can click and drag the slider
| | 04:45 | across to the right to increase, drag
it to the left to decrease, until you find
| | 04:50 | the exact size you want.
| | 04:52 | You'll also see, next to that zoom slider,
| | 04:54 | we've got this little button here
that will create a fullpage view of our
| | 04:58 | slides, so it fills the entire screen.
| | 05:01 | In this case, it happens to be 96% on my
particular monitor, with my display settings.
| | 05:07 | So, you can adjust that whatever you like.
| | 05:09 | I'm going to go down to about 81%.
| | 05:12 | If you want the Navigation pane back,
you can just go to the left-hand side
| | 05:16 | you'll see these three dots, and when
you hover over that, your mouse pointer
| | 05:19 | changes. That allows you to drag this
out, so just click and then drag to drag
| | 05:25 | it out to the right, and the further
you go, the wider it gets and the bigger
| | 05:29 | the thumbnails appear.
| | 05:30 | So, it's up to you how big or
small you want these thumbnails to be in
| | 05:33 | your Navigation pane.
| | 05:34 | There is an area down below for adding
notes: these would be speaker notes or
| | 05:39 | just notes to yourself that you wanted
to remember when addressing the slide.
| | 05:44 | And then you have some buttons in the
bottom left-hand corner for changing your views.
| | 05:47 | We're going to be talking about
those views a little bit later on.
| | 05:51 | So those are the basics of your user
interface. The big change of course is
| | 05:56 | the new Fluent user interface that makes
use of the Ribbon and the various Ribbon tabs.
| | 06:01 | Now that you're feeling a little bit
more comfortable in your surroundings, it's
| | 06:04 | time to start using this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Navigating presentations| 00:00 | There will likely be times when you
need to work on more than one presentation
| | 00:03 | at a time in PowerPoint 2011; for
example, if you needed to borrow slides from
| | 00:08 | one to be used in another - there is a
perfect scenario. And of course when
| | 00:12 | you're working with the individual
slides in a presentation, you'll need to
| | 00:16 | know how to navigate between those slides,
and that's what we're going to do right now.
| | 00:20 | Continuing to work with our NewHire
presentation that we started in the previous
| | 00:24 | lesson, and a little earlier we started
a brand-new presentation as well, so you
| | 00:28 | may still have that open.
| | 00:30 | In any case, you'll need to have more than one
presentation open at a time to follow along.
| | 00:34 | Now, if you do want to move between
presentations, you're going to use the
| | 00:38 | Window menu. Just click Window and
down at the bottom you'll see the two
| | 00:42 | presentations, or more, that you might have open.
| | 00:44 | The check mark will always appear next
to the one you're looking at, in this
| | 00:48 | case our NewHire presentation.
| | 00:50 | But to move to the new one that we
started earlier, we simply select it from the
| | 00:53 | bottom of this menu, and we
move to that presentation.
| | 00:57 | You'll also notice that each
presentation has its own set of buttons in the
| | 01:00 | top left-hand corner.
| | 01:01 | So, if you wanted to minimize this, you
could, and then of course access it from
| | 01:06 | your Dock. Just simply go down to
the Dock and down at the end you'll
| | 01:10 | see it there and the name Presentation 1.
| | 01:13 | To go back to that, simply select it.
Or you can continue to leave them both up
| | 01:17 | on your screen and use the Window
menu to flip-flop between the two.
| | 01:21 | So, just imagine borrowing slides from
an existing presentation and copying them
| | 01:25 | and pasting them into a new presentation.
| | 01:28 | That's an ideal scenario.
| | 01:30 | Now, within an individual presentation,
you may have many, many slides to look
| | 01:35 | at, and they'll appear in the left-hand
side in the Navigation pane. And you'll
| | 01:38 | notice there's a scrollbar that
allows you to scroll down through those
| | 01:41 | thumbnails. Simply select the thumbnail
by clicking it to move to that slide, and
| | 01:46 | then you can start working on it.
| | 01:48 | So, simply clicking the thumbnail is one way
to move between the slides in your presentation.
| | 01:53 | Another option is to use the
scrollbar that appears on the right-hand side.
| | 01:57 | Over here on the right-hand side of our
screen, you'll notice the scrollbar and
| | 02:00 | the blue button, but you'll also notice,
at the bottom of the scrollbar, buttons
| | 02:04 | with double arrows: two
pointing up and two pointing down.
| | 02:08 | So as you click the arrows, you'll
notice you'll be able to move down through
| | 02:12 | the slides by clicking those down arrows.
And it's one slide at a time, and you
| | 02:17 | can move up by clicking the
double arrows that point upwards.
| | 02:21 | Of course, if you prefer, simply click
and drag that slider button, and you'll
| | 02:27 | notice a little pop-up, indicating
what slide you're about to move to.
| | 02:30 | If you want to go to slide 14, click and
drag that button down until it says slide
| | 02:34 | 14 and release. It takes you
directly to that particular slide.
| | 02:38 | You'll notice it's
highlighted in your Navigation pane.
| | 02:42 | So there are many different ways
to navigate between the slides in a
| | 02:45 | presentation, and there will likely be
times in the future when you need to have
| | 02:49 | more than one presentation open at a
time, specifically to borrow slides from
| | 02:53 | one to be used in another.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing the UI layout| 00:00 | When you launch PowerPoint and start
working on a presentation, the user
| | 00:04 | interface is laid out, by
default, in a certain way.
| | 00:08 | That layout can be customized to your liking.
| | 00:11 | That's what we're going to do right now.
| | 00:13 | We're going to continue to work with
our NewHire presentation. It really doesn't
| | 00:16 | matter what slide you're
looking at, at this point.
| | 00:18 | What we're really going to
focus on are the surroundings.
| | 00:21 | For example, if you want a little
more room to work on the slide itself,
| | 00:26 | there're couple of things you can do.
| | 00:27 | Of course, you can use your zoom
slider at the very bottom right-hand corner
| | 00:31 | and zoom in a little bit, or simply
click the button to view it on the full
| | 00:35 | page, so it fits perfectly.
| | 00:38 | If you still need more room,
there're a couple more things you can do.
| | 00:41 | Well, you can start with the Ribbon.
| | 00:43 | Maybe you're not accustomed to the
Ribbon, you don't really need to use it, or
| | 00:46 | you'd like to hide it temporarily.
| | 00:48 | You'll notice there is a button in the
top right-hand corner, a little arrow
| | 00:51 | pointing up. But when you click this,
you'll notice now that you've got some
| | 00:55 | extra workspace, and the
Ribbon displays only the tabs.
| | 00:59 | You can still go to those tabs, so you
can click Charts, and it will temporarily
| | 01:03 | open up the Ribbon, but when you go back
to your presentation, just simply click
| | 01:07 | anywhere in your presentation. It stays open.
| | 01:09 | So you need to go back here to minimize it.
| | 01:12 | This gives you that extra workspace.
| | 01:14 | The other thing you can work with is, at
the very bottom of the screen, this
| | 01:18 | little area for notes.
| | 01:20 | Now mine, you can see, is really quite thin.
| | 01:23 | There is not lot of room being taken up
by notes, but if yours is a little more
| | 01:27 | extensive, we can go to the
border and click and drag.
| | 01:30 | You can come back down
there and just drag it down.
| | 01:33 | You can drag it down quite a ways to
the point where you don't see any notes at
| | 01:36 | all, but you may have notes that you
want to add to a presentation without
| | 01:40 | putting them right on the slide,
and this is good to have open.
| | 01:43 | So it's totally up to you what size that is.
| | 01:46 | Same thing goes for the
Navigation pane on the left-hand side.
| | 01:49 | Just move to the border here.
| | 01:51 | You can see those three dots that
represent, this is adjustable, so you can
| | 01:55 | click and drag it out to create less
workspace or over to the left, which
| | 01:59 | creates more workspace and minimizes these
thumbnails, so you can actually see more of them.
| | 02:04 | So if you like to be able to see the
thumbnail, and you don't necessarily need
| | 02:07 | to see what's on the slide itself, this
is a great way to create more space and
| | 02:11 | allow you to see more thumbnails in the
Navigation pane. But if you really like
| | 02:15 | to be able to see what's on the slide,
you might have to drag this border out to
| | 02:18 | the right a little bit, so you can
start to see some of the titles, at least, on
| | 02:21 | the slide, to help you navigate between
the various slides in your presentation.
| | 02:26 | So when you need to adjust the amount
of workspace you have for a slide, to
| | 02:31 | increase it or even decrease it,
remember these options, including the ability
| | 02:35 | to maximize or minimize the Ribbon.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Getting StartedCreating new presentations| 00:00 | When you are ready to create a new
presentation in PowerPoint, there are a
| | 00:03 | couple of considerations to take into account.
| | 00:07 | So that's what we are going to do right now.
| | 00:08 | We will start by closing anything you
might have open onscreen by clicking the
| | 00:12 | close button in the very top left-hand corner.
| | 00:15 | You don't need to save any
of your changes at this point.
| | 00:17 | When you close up the very last one,
you are left with this blank
| | 00:20 | screen. You can see we have got our
PowerPoint menu bar across the very top
| | 00:24 | but nothing to work on.
| | 00:26 | So now your options are to close down
PowerPoint and restart, where you will
| | 00:31 | see that Presentation Gallery, or
simply go up to the File menu and choose one
| | 00:35 | of the two new options.
| | 00:37 | The first one is New Presentation,
and this will create a new blank
| | 00:41 | presentation. Command+N
is the keyboard shortcut.
| | 00:45 | If you want some help getting started
by having some sample slides, some themes,
| | 00:50 | and layout already created for you,
you might choose New from Template.
| | 00:54 | This is going to open up that
Presentations Gallery we see every time we launch
| | 00:58 | PowerPoint, so let's go there first.
| | 01:01 | Now you are going to see the very last
place you left off using the Presentation
| | 01:05 | Gallery if you have used it before,
such as when you launch PowerPoint. So you
| | 01:09 | can see the last layout or template
you chose, and you can move your mouse
| | 01:13 | across these to get a feel for some of
the slides and their layouts, and you can
| | 01:20 | scroll through the list, just to get a
feel for what you are about to create.
| | 01:25 | There is also a zoom slider at the very
bottom, so if you want to be able to see
| | 01:28 | smaller thumbnails, just drag that to the left.
| | 01:30 | You get to see more options in this
middle panel. And still, you can hover over
| | 01:35 | the slides with your mouse
to see some sample slides.
| | 01:39 | So if you didn't want to create a brand-
new presentation and choose one of these
| | 01:43 | templates, it's just a simple
matter of clicking with it selected.
| | 01:47 | If you want to change the color scheme,
font scheme, or the slide size, you could
| | 01:51 | do so from the right-hand panel and
then simply click Choose. And this will
| | 01:56 | create a brand-new
presentation using that template.
| | 01:59 | Notice that the template has a
number of pre-designed slides for you.
| | 02:03 | They have notes. These are to help you
in the creation of your presentation.
| | 02:08 | And when you go up to the very top left-
hand corner to close it up, it's gone.
| | 02:12 | If you haven't made any changes,
you are now prompted to save them.
| | 02:15 | Now let's go back to the File
menu and choose New Presentation.
| | 02:19 | If you prefer to use the keyboard,
it's Command+N. Notice this creates a
| | 02:24 | brand-new presentation, with one blank
slide. It's a title slide where you have
| | 02:29 | a placeholder for a title and a
subtitle. But as you look over here on the
| | 02:33 | left-hand side in the Navigation pane,
that's all you have: one blank slide.
| | 02:37 | This is a brand-new blank presentation.
You are going to be starting off from
| | 02:40 | scratch, creating your own slides,
creating your own themes, backgrounds,
| | 02:45 | creating the layouts of the slides,
and inserting new slides as you go.
| | 02:50 | So these are the different ways for
you to start a brand-new presentation
| | 02:53 | in PowerPoint 2011.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding, removing, and arranging slides| 00:00 | Whether you create a new blank
presentation or use one of the templates to
| | 00:04 | create a presentation in PowerPoint 2011,
the need will arise to add new slides to
| | 00:10 | your presentation, perhaps remove
existing slides, and change the order of the
| | 00:15 | slides. And those are the
things we are going to do right now.
| | 00:18 | In a previous lesson, we started up
new blank presentation, which gave us a
| | 00:21 | single blank slide, which is a title slide.
We have an area for a title and a subtitle.
| | 00:26 | If you want to follow along, and you
don't have this, just go up to your File
| | 00:30 | menu and choose New Presentation.
| | 00:32 | You will have exactly what we have here.
| | 00:34 | Now at this point, we could type in a title.
| | 00:37 | Let's type in "A Tale of Two Trees."
That's the name of our company, Two Trees
| | 00:44 | Olive Oil Company, and if you wanted to,
you could click to add a subtitle or
| | 00:49 | just click off to the edge to
deselect that text box, and leave it as is.
| | 00:54 | Now when you are ready for a new slide there
are number of different ways to add a new slide.
| | 00:58 | You will notice on the Ribbon, with the
Home tab selected, right in the left-hand
| | 01:02 | corner, there is a New Slide button.
| | 01:05 | Clicking the New Slide button will add
a new slide, and it will automatically
| | 01:09 | add default layout, which is title and content.
| | 01:13 | You will have an area for your title and an
area down below for different types of content.
| | 01:18 | If you want to be able to choose a
layout, just click the dropdown arrow that's
| | 01:22 | off to the right of that button, and
you'll see the different layouts, including
| | 01:27 | another title slide. There is
Title and Content, the default.
| | 01:30 | We have also got one called Section Header.
| | 01:33 | If you want contents side by side, you
can choose Two Content. That is Blank.
| | 01:37 | It won't even have
placeholders for a title and subtitle.
| | 01:40 | So lots of different
options, depending on your needs.
| | 01:43 | Let's go to Title and Content, and
when you select that, it's added.
| | 01:49 | Now you can add a title to this slide,
and down below, the content could be a
| | 01:53 | bulleted list, Click to add text, or
you go to the icons to add different types
| | 01:58 | of content, like tables, charts. It
could be a graph or like an org chart, for
| | 02:03 | example, using a SmartArt graphic.
| | 02:05 | You could add different types of media,
including movies. And if you wanted to,
| | 02:10 | you could choose ClipArt, or if you
wanted to insert a picture from an existing
| | 02:14 | file, you could do that too. Lots of
different content that can be added.
| | 02:18 | Now let's move to an existing
presentation where we have more slides to work with.
| | 02:23 | So we will close up our new presentation.
No need to save it; just click Don't Save.
| | 02:27 | If you've got the exercise files, you
can open up this one called Orientation2,
| | 02:32 | and you can see we have a number of
slides in our Navigation pane, as we drag
| | 02:37 | the slider down. There are quite a few
slides. And if we look at the status bar
| | 02:42 | at the very bottom,
we're at slide 1 of a total of 14.
| | 02:46 | The first one here is a testimonial.
And it looks like we need a title slide,
| | 02:50 | so we are going to insert a new
slide a different way this time.
| | 02:53 | Let's use the Insert menu.
| | 02:55 | Click Insert, and you will see New
Slide right at the top, and there is the
| | 02:59 | keyboard shortcut: Command+Shift+N as in New.
| | 03:02 | You could insert a duplicate slide, so
you end up with two slides the same and
| | 03:05 | then just change the content.
| | 03:07 | Or if you want to insert a new slide
from another presentation, an existing
| | 03:11 | presentation, you could use this
option that allows you to select the
| | 03:14 | presentation, select the
slide, and it will be inserted.
| | 03:18 | The question is, 'Where will it be inserted?'
| | 03:20 | Let's choose New Slide right at the top.
| | 03:22 | Well, by default it's going to go after
the selected slide in our Navigation pane.
| | 03:27 | So it becomes the new slide number two,
and you will notice the default layout.
| | 03:32 | It has a title and content down below.
| | 03:35 | But really what we want as a title slide,
and we want it to be slide number one.
| | 03:40 | So we have some different options now.
| | 03:42 | One option is to change the existing
layout and then move it, or if we wanted
| | 03:47 | to, we could just remove this slide.
| | 03:49 | So to remove a slide, it just has to
be selected over here on the left-hand
| | 03:53 | side, and press your Delete key on
the keyboard. Gone, just like that.
| | 03:57 | Now we will go back to the first slide
and click, because this is the vicinity
| | 04:01 | where we want our title slide to go.
| | 04:03 | We will try another method.
| | 04:05 | This time right-click and when you
right-click that thumbnail, you'll notice an
| | 04:09 | option is New Slide. There it is.
| | 04:12 | We also have Duplicate Slide.
| | 04:13 | We can delete the slide if we wanted to, as well.
| | 04:17 | So if we choose New Slide, it gets
inserted, and now to move it, all we have to
| | 04:23 | do is click and drag it up.
| | 04:25 | Now you will notice when you get
above the first slide, it kind of shifts
| | 04:28 | down on you, and then it means it's safe to
let go, and you've just rearranged your slides.
| | 04:33 | Now as we scroll down a little bit,
we see we do have two slides that
| | 04:38 | are exactly the same.
| | 04:40 | Let's say we want to delete this one.
| | 04:41 | Let's try right-clicking slide 5
and choose Delete Slide from here.
| | 04:46 | So if you don't like using the keyboard,
| | 04:47 | just right-click and choose
Delete from that pop-up menu.
| | 04:51 | Also, if you need to rearrange slides
and you have got many of them, you may
| | 04:55 | not want to work in the Navigation pane.
In that case, you could change views to
| | 04:58 | the Slide Sorter view.
| | 05:00 | Down in the bottom left-hand corner,
it's the second button. And when you click
| | 05:03 | it, you are going to see a whole
screen full of your thumbnails.
| | 05:08 | These are representations of
your slides, so this is a great view
| | 05:11 | for rearranging slides.
| | 05:13 | May be the Introductions
should go before the Testimonial.
| | 05:16 | So you just click and drag that
thumbnail and slip it in between slides 1 and 2.
| | 05:22 | Now you have rearranged them.
| | 05:24 | And you could do the same thing if
you wanted the Management Team after the
| | 05:27 | Photo Album: just click and drag.
| | 05:29 | Now you can select multiple slides here as well.
| | 05:32 | For example, if you wanted the
Testimonial and Our Story, click Testimonial,
| | 05:38 | hold down your Shift key and click
Our Story. Now you have got two slides
| | 05:41 | selected, so you can move them both
after the Photo Album perhaps, just by
| | 05:45 | clicking and dragging.
| | 05:46 | Notice the 2 that appears in the
bottom corner and when you release after
| | 05:50 | slide 5, they have been rearranged.
| | 05:53 | So rearranging your slides,
this is the ideal view -
| | 05:55 | I am going to move this one back after
our Management Team - called Slide Sorter
| | 06:01 | view, and when you are done
rearranging your slides, you can go back to the
| | 06:04 | Normal view, which is our Slide view,
by clicking that first button in the
| | 06:08 | bottom left-hand corner, and you'll be
looking at the slide you just left off,
| | 06:11 | in this case the photo album, for me.
| | 06:13 | So let's go back up to the top here.
| | 06:17 | Notice that our first slide here is not
really a title slide, so we can change
| | 06:21 | the layout just by simply going to
that same section of our Ribbon, click the
| | 06:25 | Layout dropdown, and just choose one
of the other layouts that we can choose
| | 06:28 | from, and that's the
Title Slide, and there we go.
| | 06:31 | So when you need to insert, remove, and
rearrange slides in your presentation,
| | 06:36 | you have a number of options,
depending on your preference.
| | 06:39 | Some people like to use
the Ribbon. It's brand-new.
| | 06:42 | It's context-sensitive.
| | 06:44 | It's always going to have those
tools handy when you need them.
| | 06:47 | If you prefer to use
keyboard shortcuts, you can do that.
| | 06:49 | There is also the menu bar with
the Insert menu, and don't forget,
| | 06:53 | right-clicking, or Ctrl+Clicking,
allows you to select from a pop-up menu.
| | 06:58 | In either case, you will be able to
insert, remove, and rearrange your slides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving time with Outline mode| 00:00 | When first starting out on a new
presentation in PowerPoint, you might want to
| | 00:04 | focus on the content.
| | 00:06 | You are not concerned with backgrounds
and schemes, adding pictures and media
| | 00:10 | and so on; you just need to get your
slides created, get the content in there,
| | 00:15 | and a great tool for doing so to keep
you focused is something called Outline
| | 00:19 | mode. And we are going to look at that now
using our Orientation slide presentation here.
| | 00:24 | First, we will go up to the very top of
the Navigation pane and click Outline,
| | 00:28 | and this switches us into Outline mode.
| | 00:30 | Now on the right-hand side, you are
still going to see a preview of your slide,
| | 00:34 | but notice the thumbnails are gone now
from the Navigation pane, and you are
| | 00:37 | looking at your slides and the
content, so just the text content:
| | 00:42 | titles, bullets, maybe subtitles, for
example. And you are going to see we have
| | 00:47 | a number of slides that are all numbered
down the left-hand side here, so we can
| | 00:50 | go to any of these slides and
start editing the actual content.
| | 00:53 | Let's start right at the
very top with slide number one.
| | 00:57 | Now this is a new blank slide.
| | 00:59 | It's the title slide, and
there's nothing showing up next to it.
| | 01:02 | When we click next to slide one, we
can start typing. And in this case it
| | 01:05 | would be our title,
| | 01:06 | so let's type in New Hire Orientation.
| | 01:09 | Now look what happens when you
press Return on your keyboard.
| | 01:14 | Automatically PowerPoint wants to
start a new slide. A new slide is inserted.
| | 01:17 | We can see it over here on the right-hand side.
| | 01:19 | It's a Title and Content layout.
| | 01:23 | But really, what we wanted was to put in
maybe the subtitle here, under New Hire
| | 01:28 | Orientation, or maybe start a bulleted list.
| | 01:30 | In that case, you are going to hit your Tab key.
| | 01:33 | When you hit the Tab key, you'll
notice that you are still on slide 1 now,
| | 01:37 | and you are ready to start typing
your subtitle, and that's because we are
| | 01:40 | using a title slide.
| | 01:42 | So let's just type in the
year, let's say. There you go.
| | 01:47 | Now you have got your title slide, you
have got your title and your subtitle
| | 01:51 | showing up, and that's all we need.
| | 01:53 | We are focused on the content. Later
on we will worry about formatting it to
| | 01:56 | look nice with backgrounds and schemes
and all that kind of stuff, but for now
| | 02:00 | we are focused on our content.
| | 02:02 | Let's go down to Introductions here. Here
we can see in slide 2 all of the content.
| | 02:07 | It's in a bulleted list format, so this
would be typically a slide that contains
| | 02:11 | a title and content, the
content being a bulleted list.
| | 02:15 | So we can start making changes to our
text easily just by clicking in the spot
| | 02:19 | where we want to type.
| | 02:20 | Now it also takes us to that slide.
We see it over on the right-hand side, and we
| | 02:24 | can start typing in additional text.
| | 02:26 | Now let's scroll down a little bit further.
| | 02:32 | I will just use the scrollbar to scroll
down the list of slides here, and we'll
| | 02:36 | go to slide number 6 here.
| | 02:38 | Now in this case, you can see we have
got a photo album, and we have got a list
| | 02:42 | that shows up in both form, and if we
want to create sub-bullets, so we can
| | 02:47 | create levels of our bullets.
| | 02:48 | All we have to do is click where we
want to indent, for under 'Our Farm' we
| | 02:53 | click next to Ready for
Pickin' and just press your Tab key.
| | 02:58 | Tab key indents to the next level.
| | 03:00 | So under Our Farm, we have a sub-level.
| | 03:02 | Now we could do the same for Fresh.
| | 03:06 | Just click in front of Fresh. Press your Tab key.
| | 03:09 | If you want to go back a level,
the opposite of Tab is Shift+Tab.
| | 03:12 | Hold down Shift while you have to
hit the Tab key, and Fresh comes back.
| | 03:16 | Let's do the same now for Ready for
Pickin', because if you wanted to, you could
| | 03:20 | select multiple bullets - I'll do a Shift+
Tab there - and we will just click and
| | 03:24 | drag on Ready for Pickin',
all the way down to Extraction.
| | 03:28 | Let's say those three should
be sub-bullets of Our Farm.
| | 03:32 | Now when you hit the Tab key, all
three are indented to the next level.
| | 03:36 | Press Tab again. By accident, you go to a
next level, so to bring them back, hold
| | 03:41 | down Shift, press Tab, and back they come.
| | 03:44 | So that's all there is to
working in Outline mode.
| | 03:46 | If you want to add a new slide,
all you do is press Return.
| | 03:50 | Let's go down to Contact, the very
last slide, and click at the end of
| | 03:53 | Contact and press Return.
| | 03:56 | This creates a new slide, slide 15, and
notice the default slide is inserted for us.
| | 04:01 | It's Title and Content. And because we
are working in Outline mode, we are focused
| | 04:05 | on the content itself.
| | 04:07 | So in this case, we could just type in the title.
| | 04:09 | Let's type in Good-bye.
| | 04:13 | When you press Enter or Return on your
keyboard, notice what happens. A new slide
| | 04:17 | is added, but just press Tab, and
because now we are working on a Title and
| | 04:21 | Content layout type slide, we get our
first bullet, and we can see it down at
| | 04:26 | the bottom of our Navigation pane here.
| | 04:29 | Let's type in a couple of
sub-bullets here; for example,
| | 04:33 | part of the good-bye is to
have our closing message.
| | 04:40 | Now when you press Return, it
actually starts the next bullet.
| | 04:45 | So "Hand in Paperwork," and there we have got
our two new bullets under our title of "Good-bye."
| | 04:55 | So when you really want to focus on
the content of your presentation, perhaps
| | 04:59 | you are just getting started, you can't
be bothered with the formatting of your
| | 05:03 | slides at this point,
| | 05:04 | you just want to get the slides in the
content, to get the right order, you can
| | 05:08 | work in Outline mode to focus on what
needs to appear on the slides, as opposed
| | 05:12 | to how the slides appear.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Separating slides into sections| 00:00 | Sometimes presentations can become
quite lengthy, with many, many slides in a
| | 00:05 | single presentation, and that's okay,
so long as the content on the slides are
| | 00:10 | relevant and useful to
the audience viewing them.
| | 00:13 | In those cases, to stay organized, you
might want to consider using something
| | 00:17 | that's built into PowerPoint to help
you stay organized called sections.
| | 00:20 | Sections can be added to your slides
so your audience members know when a
| | 00:25 | new section begins.
| | 00:26 | But they can also be added to your
Thumbnail pane, so you know exactly what
| | 00:31 | section you're in and focus on that
section by expanding and collapsing.
| | 00:35 | We are going to do all of this
now, continuing to work with our
| | 00:37 | Orientation presentation.
| | 00:39 | In fact, we're going to scroll up to
the very top. Click anywhere in the first
| | 00:43 | slide if you're in Outline mode.
| | 00:45 | Click the Slides button with me to
switch over to our thumbnails, and you can
| | 00:49 | adjust this pane accordingly.
| | 00:51 | All right, currently we have a great
number of slides, and as we move through the
| | 00:56 | slides scrolling down, many of the
slides can be grouped into a single section.
| | 01:02 | If we say, for example, that all of
the slides dealing with the company, like
| | 01:07 | Our Story, Management Team, et cetera could
be grouped under a history heading,
| | 01:12 | well, in that case for our audience, we
might want to insert a slide that says
| | 01:15 | this is the History section.
| | 01:18 | So under Testimonial and before
Our Story, we'll click right between
| | 01:24 | thumbnails for slide 3 and 4.
| | 01:26 | You are going to see this little faint line;
| | 01:28 | this is where we want to insert our new slide.
| | 01:30 | So we'll just go up to the New
Slide button, but click the arrow on the
| | 01:35 | right-hand side to see the dropdown.
| | 01:37 | This allows us to choose from a
series of layouts, and there is one
| | 01:41 | called Section Header.
| | 01:43 | When we click this, we get the new slide.
| | 01:45 | It says, "Click to add title," on the right-
hand side, so we'll do that, and we'll
| | 01:49 | just call this one HISTORY.
| | 01:50 | We can type in HISTORY.
| | 01:52 | Then we've got our first section,
at least the slide for our section.
| | 01:59 | As we scrolled a little further down,
you can see a new section kind of begins
| | 02:03 | with the Product slide.
| | 02:04 | So we'll click between slides 9 and
10. Again, we see that faint line.
| | 02:09 | So we can go up to the New Slide
dropdown and choose Section Header.
| | 02:14 | In this case, it's going to be all our products.
| | 02:19 | We'll add one more.
| | 02:20 | We'll just scroll little
further down, the last few slides -
| | 02:23 | Come and See Us, Contact, and Good-bye -
| | 02:26 | they are all part of the conclusion,
| | 02:28 | so, we'll make sure we are in
between slides 14 and 15 when we click.
| | 02:33 | Now, we'll insert that new section
header, and we'll click to add title, calling
| | 02:39 | this one our CONCLUSIONS section.
| | 02:41 | So, our audience is going to know when
a new section, or group of slides, begins,
| | 02:47 | but does PowerPoint know? Not until we
actually insert the sections themselves,
| | 02:52 | which will help us to stay
organized when working on groups of slides.
| | 02:56 | So let's just scroll down to our
first section header, which is HISTORY, and
| | 03:01 | we'll click between slides 3 and 4.
| | 03:03 | This time I'm actually going to
insert a section, a little break - kind of
| | 03:07 | like chapters in a book.
| | 03:09 | So, I'll go up to the Section dropdown
button that appears on the Ribbon, with
| | 03:14 | the Home tab selected, and click the
first option, which is Add Section.
| | 03:18 | Now, not only is a new section added -
it's called Untitled - but we also see
| | 03:22 | this Rename Section dialog appear with
untitled selection already selected for
| | 03:28 | us, so we can type right over that.
And we are going to type in the word
| | 03:31 | 'History' to match our slide.
| | 03:34 | You can press Return on the keyboard or
click the Rename button, and you can see
| | 03:38 | now we've got a new section, History.
| | 03:40 | The number you see in brackets
represents the number of slides in that section.
| | 03:45 | That is the remaining slides in the
presentation, unless we create another new
| | 03:49 | section, which we are going to do.
| | 03:50 | So, we'll just scroll down, until
we see our PRODUCTS section header -
| | 03:54 | there it is - and click between
slides 9 and 10 and add another section.
| | 04:01 | This one's going to be called
Products. Press Return, and it's locked in.
| | 04:07 | Now, there are nine slides in that section,
and we'll scroll down and create one
| | 04:11 | more section, which is the
conclusion, between the slides 14 and 15.
| | 04:16 | When you click there, you'll see that
faint line. Click the section button, and
| | 04:20 | add the section called CONCLUSION.
| | 04:25 | When you press Return, there you go.
So there are four in the CONCLUSION section.
| | 04:30 | As we scroll up, under PRODUCTS, there
are five slides, and under HISTORY, looks
| | 04:36 | like we have six in brackets here.
| | 04:38 | Something else happened when we started
creating sections. A default section is
| | 04:42 | created for you, and there are
three: the first three slides.
| | 04:45 | We didn't actually insert a section
there, but it became the default section
| | 04:49 | when we added our first new
section, which was HITSTORY
| | 04:53 | So to rename this just go
where it says Default Section.
| | 04:57 | Right-click or Ctrl+Click, if you got that
single button mouse, and select Rename Section.
| | 05:03 | There it is, Default Section. We can type in
something like Introduction, for example -
| | 05:08 | these are introductory slides.
And press Return to lock that in.
| | 05:12 | So, now we've got our various sections to
match the section headers that we've inserted.
| | 05:19 | What is the advantage to this?
| | 05:20 | Well, let's say we want to
focus on the HISTORY section.
| | 05:23 | We can collapse these sections by
clicking the little arrows you see just to the
| | 05:27 | left of the name of the section.
| | 05:29 | When you click the arrow it's collapsed.
| | 05:31 | Now, we don't see the slides, and
this will not affect the presentation.
| | 05:34 | Those slides will be
presented when we play our slideshow.
| | 05:38 | But now we can scroll
down to the other sections.
| | 05:41 | We are going to focus on our HISTORY
section, so we don't need to see all of
| | 05:45 | the product slides.
| | 05:46 | We can collapse that, as well
as a CONCLUSION, and there go.
| | 05:49 | I've got just the HISTORY slides
showing up in our Navigation pane, so we
| | 05:53 | can focus on those.
| | 05:55 | It could be formatted differently
than the other sections if we wanted to.
| | 05:58 | We can make changes to all of the
slides by clicking the actual section header.
| | 06:03 | So, in this case if we click HISTORY,
you'll notice each of the thumbnails is
| | 06:07 | actually highlighted or selected.
| | 06:09 | You see that border around all of the slides.
| | 06:11 | So anything we do now in the way of
formatting will affect every one of those slides;
| | 06:14 | a big timesaver.
| | 06:17 | Let's switch over to our Slide Sorter
view, and you'll also see your sections
| | 06:21 | here, collapsed as well as expanded.
| | 06:25 | Let's expand our Introduction, and our Products.
| | 06:29 | Let's say Products really
should start before the History.
| | 06:32 | You can go right to the
separator, click next to Products, and
| | 06:37 | if you wanted to move that, just go up
to the Section button, and you'll notice
| | 06:41 | you've got a number of new options here.
| | 06:43 | We can rename the section from here,
remove the entire section if we wanted to,
| | 06:48 | remove the entire section and the slides.
| | 06:49 | Look at this: we can remove all the
sections if we don't want them, start over,
| | 06:54 | and we also have collapse and expand from here.
| | 06:57 | Let's say we want to move this section.
| | 06:59 | We just want to put it before History.
| | 07:02 | You can actually do that from our Normal view.
| | 07:05 | We'll go back to Normal view,
and we'll just scroll up.
| | 07:08 | Now, everything's been expanded, because
we expanded it in our Slide Sorter view.
| | 07:13 | If we want to scroll up to History, there it is.
| | 07:17 | If we want to move that up before the Introduction,
| | 07:21 | we can just click and drag it.
| | 07:23 | You'll notice you are actually dragging the bar.
| | 07:28 | When you see the No sign,
it means you can't let go.
| | 07:30 | It's not a place where you're allowed to let go.
| | 07:33 | When it disappears, it's a
place where you can drop it.
| | 07:37 | Now, we can't go ahead of the
Introduction until it expands open, and when you
| | 07:40 | let go, you will have moved the
Introduction or the History to the top,
| | 07:44 | replacing Introduction.
| | 07:46 | That doesn't really make sense.
| | 07:48 | You can see the Introduction
now comes after our History.
| | 07:51 | Just go back to that section
header. Just click it and go up to the
| | 07:55 | Section button dropdown.
| | 07:58 | If you wanted to move it, you see
there's no option here on this menu,
| | 08:02 | but if we go down to Introduction and
right-click or Ctrl+Click, we do have the
| | 08:06 | option to move sections here.
| | 08:08 | So, it's a little bit different from
what we see from the Section button.
| | 08:11 | We can move that section up
or down. Let's move it up.
| | 08:15 | Now, Introduction does appear back at the top.
| | 08:17 | Scroll down. The next
section is our History section.
| | 08:22 | So, using sections are a great way
to help you stay focused on a group of
| | 08:26 | slides - great for formatting.
| | 08:28 | Later on, when we play our slideshow,
you'll see that having sections is also
| | 08:33 | handy when playing your
presentation in front of an audience.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Checking compatibility| 00:00 | As you work on your presentations in
PowerPoint, you'll probably think about
| | 00:04 | saving it eventually -
| | 00:05 | something we'll talk
about in the next movie.
| | 00:08 | But before you do that, you'll have to
consider whether or not you are going to
| | 00:11 | be sharing it with others,
using it on another computer. And
| | 00:15 | in those cases, those computers or
other people may not have upgraded
| | 00:19 | to PowerPoint 2011,
| | 00:21 | so you'll want to save back to a
compatible version, and you'll want to check to make
| | 00:25 | sure that your presentation is compatible.
| | 00:28 | The way to do that is to
use the Compatibility Report.
| | 00:31 | We are going to continue to work with
our Orientation presentation here.
| | 00:35 | And all we've done, really, that's a little
bit different with this presentation is
| | 00:38 | to add the sections.
| | 00:40 | Let's see if it's compatible if we
were to save it back to an earlier version,
| | 00:44 | or maybe even a Windows version.
| | 00:47 | Well, there is a couple of ways
to access the Compatibility Report.
| | 00:50 | We need to open up the Toolbox.
| | 00:52 | You can do that right from the toolbar.
| | 00:54 | Right above the Ribbon, you'll notice
a button to show or hide the Toolbox,
| | 00:59 | or you could go to the View menu if
you want and access the Compatibility
| | 01:02 | Report right from there.
| | 01:04 | But in the Toolbox, you'll notice the
last button, the wrench, represents the
| | 01:09 | Compatibility Report.
| | 01:11 | Now, if you are going to be saving it
to PowerPoint 2011, the current version,
| | 01:15 | obviously, there would be no issues.
| | 01:17 | So, down below if you look at the results, no
compatibility issues are found in this case.
| | 01:23 | But what if we want to save
it back to an earlier version?
| | 01:25 | When we click the dropdown, you'll
notice a number of versions to choose from.
| | 01:29 | For example, we could choose all Mac
and Windows Versions right at the top -
| | 01:34 | this covers PowerPoint 97 through
2011. Or we could go to a specific version,
| | 01:40 | like PowerPoint 2008. Let's select that.
| | 01:42 | Now automatically, you'll see that the
document, or in this case presentation, is rechecked.
| | 01:49 | There is a button to recheck the document
at any time, and there is a result here.
| | 01:54 | One issue: slides will no longer
be grouped into sections if we save
| | 01:58 | in PowerPoint 2008.
| | 02:00 | So, in other words, we couldn't do that
back then, and in this case if we save
| | 02:04 | it back to an earlier version,
we'll lose that functionality.
| | 02:08 | Down below, if we could fix it, we
would have access to some buttons to fix,
| | 02:12 | ignore, and just all we have to do is select it.
| | 02:16 | You'll see, down below, we can't fix
that, but we can choose to ignore it.
| | 02:20 | So if we save our presentation in an
earlier file format, we will lose the sections.
| | 02:26 | If we try some of the other
formats, we'll get the same results.
| | 02:30 | We could go back to PowerPoint 98,
which is a Mac version, but then we have our
| | 02:35 | Windows options as well.
| | 02:36 | Let's say we're collaborating with
someone on this project, and they use Windows
| | 02:41 | PC, and they're running PowerPoint 2003.
| | 02:44 | Well, we can select that format, and
you'll see the same thing happens here.
| | 02:49 | We'll lose our sections, but
everything else seems to be okay.
| | 02:53 | So in that case, we would simply save
it back to that version and share it with
| | 02:57 | the person who's working on a Windows computer.
| | 02:59 | You can close up the Toolbox when you're
done checking the Compatibility Report.
| | 03:04 | Once you know whether or not you're
going to be compatible, fix any issues, or
| | 03:08 | ignore existing issues that can't be fixed,
| | 03:10 | you're then ready to save your
presentation, something we'll do next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving your presentations| 00:00 | Probably the most important thing to
learn about working with a PowerPoint
| | 00:03 | presentation is how to save it.
| | 00:05 | You don't want to have to redo your work
if something goes wrong, like a crash or
| | 00:09 | a power outage. Well, there are some
fail-safes built into PowerPoint, but there are
| | 00:14 | also many different ways to save a presentation, so
| | 00:16 | we are going to talk about those now,
continuing to work with our Orientation
| | 00:20 | presentation. Let's just
start by making a minor change.
| | 00:23 | We'll click on the first slide in the
Thumbnail pane, and just click in front of
| | 00:27 | the 2010 Year in the
subtitle, and let's add a month.
| | 00:33 | Let's try December and a space.
| | 00:35 | All right, when we click off the slide,
we can see exactly what it's going to
| | 00:38 | look like, and we made a minor adjustment.
| | 00:41 | We want to save that.
| | 00:42 | The easiest way, of course, to save is
to click the save icon on the toolbar.
| | 00:46 | It looks like a floppy disk, and
this simply updates any changes.
| | 00:51 | You don't have an opportunity to change
where you're saving it to, to change the
| | 00:55 | name, to change the format.
| | 00:57 | All of that is accessed by using the
Save As command, which we're going to
| | 01:01 | look at in a moment.
| | 01:03 | Now if you are in the habit of saving
on a regular basis, it's not about habit,
| | 01:07 | but there are some things built into
PowerPoint to help you with that as well.
| | 01:10 | Let's take a quick look.
| | 01:12 | We'll click PowerPoint on the
toolbar and then select Preferences.
| | 01:17 | Now from here, you are going to select
or click the fourth button in. Again,
| | 01:21 | it looks like a floppy disk, the save
button, and you will see your save
| | 01:24 | options that are set.
| | 01:25 | Anything checked off is turned on,
anything without a check, like prompting for
| | 01:29 | document properties, is turned off.
| | 01:32 | So if you wanted to add properties to
your document, you'd do that manually.
| | 01:36 | Or you could have it happen automatically
every time you save, you will be prompted
| | 01:39 | for those properties.
| | 01:40 | Things like who's the author and the
date and time and that kind of stuff.
| | 01:44 | They are all part of the document properties.
| | 01:46 | Now if you look a little bit further
down, there is a Save AutoRecover info
| | 01:52 | every and the default set to 10 minutes.
| | 01:55 | This means every 10 minutes there is a
backup of your presentation that's being
| | 01:59 | made, and it can be recovered at any time.
| | 02:03 | So if you're in the habit of saving
every 10 minutes, you really don't have to
| | 02:07 | because PowerPoint's doing it for you,
and you can see it's going to be saved
| | 02:11 | with the new extension there, pptx.
| | 02:14 | So that's just something that's
there in the background you should know
| | 02:17 | about. But if you want to save your
presentation to another format, another
| | 02:23 | location, or you want to change the name of
your presentation, then you need to use Save As.
| | 02:28 | We access that from the File menu, so
click File, and choose Save As. Now, just
| | 02:34 | before we do, you will notice down below
there are some options that are quickly
| | 02:38 | available, little shortcuts to save as
pictures and movie. But when we click
| | 02:42 | Save As, we'll be able to
access those options as well.
| | 02:46 | And just before we save this, I want
you to see something. The Compatibility
| | 02:50 | Report is also available from here,
something we talked about in a previous
| | 02:54 | movie, and it does tell us that there is
one compatibility issue that depends on
| | 02:59 | the format were saving to.
| | 03:01 | So if we click the Format button, and
we choose an older format - for example,
| | 03:06 | let's say we want to go back to PowerPoint 98 to 2004 -
| | 03:12 | you will see we do have one
compatibility issue. And if we want to see what that
| | 03:15 | is, click Compatibility Report, and it opens up.
| | 03:19 | So you see here we have a message that the
check was run and at least one issue is found.
| | 03:23 | If you don't like seeing this message,
just click the check box and click OK.
| | 03:28 | Now you will see over here in the
Compatibility Report that because we have sections,
| | 03:33 | we will lose those sections saving
to the older PowerPoint 2003 format.
| | 03:37 | We can close the Toolbox by
clicking the red X in the top-left corner.
| | 03:41 | Let's go back to file and Save As.
| | 03:45 | Now let's say we want to change the location.
| | 03:47 | You can navigate to a specific location,
maybe your Documents, for example, or
| | 03:52 | in this case the Desktop.
| | 03:54 | I am going to use the Desktop.
| | 03:55 | We can change the format.
| | 03:57 | Let's change it back now, and you'll
see all the different formats you have to
| | 04:01 | choose from. Specialty Formats appear
down below, Common Formats at the top.
| | 04:06 | You can even save this to a PDF, so a Portable
Document Format that anybody could look
| | 04:11 | at using Adobe reader.
| | 04:13 | So it wouldn't be a presentation anymore;
it would be an actual file saved to a movie a .mov
| | 04:19 | file. You could even save it to a template,
| | 04:21 | so you could use this as your
starting point for future presentations.
| | 04:26 | But let's just leave it at 97 to
2004, so we are going to save it back.
| | 04:31 | We do have that one issue.
| | 04:32 | We already know what it is.
| | 04:33 | Let's change the name from
Orientation 6 to NewOrientation.
| | 04:42 | So these are some of things you can do
with Save As: change the name, change the
| | 04:45 | location, and change the format.
| | 04:48 | When you click Save, all
the changes will be saved.
| | 04:52 | If there was an issue - in this case
there was - you can see some of the elements
| | 04:56 | in your presentation may
not work or may be removed.
| | 05:00 | So when we continue, the save is made.
It doesn't look a whole lot different, but
| | 05:05 | when we look over at the navigation
pane, you'll notice those sections are gone,
| | 05:09 | because we've saved back to an earlier format.
| | 05:11 | We saw it in the Compatibility Report.
| | 05:13 | We were warned those sections would be removed.
| | 05:16 | You see the new name at the
very top in the Title bar.
| | 05:19 | All of those were available to us,
thanks to the Save As option.
| | 05:23 | Now of course, there are some other
formats that we might want to save to,
| | 05:27 | saving to a movie, different ways to
share as well; we will be talking about
| | 05:31 | those in upcoming movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Formatting a PresentationUsing themes| 00:00 | Once you've created the slides in your
presentation - maybe you've got all of the
| | 00:03 | content on those slides - the slides are
in the right order for now, you might be
| | 00:08 | thinking about adding some
visual interest to your presentation.
| | 00:12 | You want to be able to capture the
interest of your audience, keep them
| | 00:15 | focused on your presentation, and not bored
with what they're seeing up on the big screen.
| | 00:19 | Well that could include putting imagery
in the background, adding color schemes,
| | 00:25 | different fonts, and so on.
| | 00:27 | You could do that yourself. It would
be very time-consuming, and you run the
| | 00:31 | risk of possibly using the wrong color
combinations and maybe fonts that don't
| | 00:35 | go with one another.
| | 00:36 | So a very handy option here in
PowerPoint 2011 is to use the built-in themes.
| | 00:42 | They are there for you; you simply
select them and make minor adjustments.
| | 00:46 | We're going to do that now using our
New Hire presentation, and we're going to
| | 00:49 | use the Ribbon because
there is a tab labeled Themes.
| | 00:52 | When you click Themes, you're going to
see options, all related to working with
| | 00:57 | themes in a presentation.
| | 00:59 | Now, currently the presentation
we're working with is very plain.
| | 01:02 | There is no background, very standard
fonts, no imagery, and the first thing we
| | 01:07 | are going to work with is the slide size.
| | 01:10 | You have to think about your
presentation. Is it going to be on a widescreen, for
| | 01:13 | example? Well in that case, you
probably want to change the slide size.
| | 01:17 | So let's go to Page Setup and click the button.
| | 01:19 | And you do have a few options here.
You've got our standard (4:3) layout
| | 01:24 | that we're working with now, then
there is widescreen, which is 16:9, and
| | 01:29 | there is another widescreen option as well,
16:10, which is very common with computer monitors.
| | 01:34 | And if you want to be very technical
about it, you can go to Page Setup option.
| | 01:38 | This will open up the window where
you can adjust many different features.
| | 01:42 | Let's go to widescreen though, 16:9. Let's say
we're going to be using a native 16:9
| | 01:47 | projector, and we want to use the entire
screen, and not just use a portion of it,
| | 01:51 | so we'll set up our slides
to coincide with that ratio.
| | 01:55 | So now you can see all of our
thumbnails here, and currently selected slide
| | 01:59 | displayed in widescreen,
but there is still no pizzazz.
| | 02:04 | It's time to add that by selecting a theme.
| | 02:06 | And you're going to see a row with
samples on those little thumbnails.
| | 02:10 | Now if you want to click one, like Angles for
example, you'll see it applied to your slides.
| | 02:15 | You can see what that would look like.
| | 02:18 | Go to another one and you'll see
what it'd look like with that particular
| | 02:21 | theme, and these themes are using the
default color combinations, fonts, and backgrounds.
| | 02:26 | Now there are more, so you could click
this little arrow at the bottom-center to
| | 02:30 | display a huge list of themes to choose from.
| | 02:34 | This is great. All you have to do is
find one that relates to your presentation,
| | 02:37 | maybe your company colors, for example.
| | 02:39 | So we're going to go down
to one like Revolution here.
| | 02:43 | This is kind of cool looking.
| | 02:44 | It's very blue, but you can
see it's got a nice feel to it.
| | 02:48 | It's going to keep the interest of our audience.
| | 02:50 | And of course there are other things
we can do with themes, like change up the
| | 02:54 | colors: maybe our company colors
are not blues, but rather greens.
| | 02:58 | You'll notice as we move across the
Ribbon to the right here we've got a Colors
| | 03:02 | button, and because of the arrow, we
know it's going to show us some options.
| | 03:06 | So we might want to go to one that
suits our company colors. In this case, the
| | 03:10 | Two Trees Olive Oil company
deals with a lot of green,
| | 03:13 | s o you can scroll down through the
list until we find something appropriate.
| | 03:19 | And of course we can try these out as
well. Simply scroll down to one that
| | 03:23 | looks like it might work, maybe
Solstice, for example, and you realize
| | 03:27 | that's not really good at all. Go back to
the Colors button and select a different color.
| | 03:36 | Austin looks pretty good for the Olive
Oil company. And as we scroll down our
| | 03:40 | thumbnails in the Navigation pane, you
can see the same background. The same color
| | 03:45 | scheme has been applied to
all of our slides for us.
| | 03:49 | And that's the beauty of using themes.
| | 03:51 | You might not be too keen on the fonts. Well,
you can choose different font schemes as well.
| | 03:55 | Click the Fonts button: you'll see a whole
list of font schemes that can be selected from.
| | 04:01 | Find one that you like and select it,
and it will affect all of the slides
| | 04:06 | in your presentation.
| | 04:07 | And of course you can experiment with
these by simply reopening that dropdown and
| | 04:12 | selecting something different.
I kind of like that one right there.
| | 04:17 | Same thing goes for the background.
| | 04:18 | When you click the background you can
see we've got these different backgrounds
| | 04:22 | to choose from, different gradients.
And you can see the colors that we might
| | 04:26 | want to use are here like Style 6,
for example, when we select it.
| | 04:30 | This is the background.
| | 04:31 | This is behind the actual imagery that
we see here, and it might be a little
| | 04:35 | bit too off, that green.
| | 04:38 | So let's go back to Background and maybe
choose the top, which is without a gradient.
| | 04:42 | I like that one, and you just see it
around the edge of our slides, in the
| | 04:45 | background behind our images.
| | 04:48 | The images are also part of the theme.
| | 04:50 | So once you've got this and you've
made some adjustments, you can even save the
| | 04:54 | theme if you wanted to; that's
something we're going to talk about next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating your own themes| 00:00 | Using the built-in themes in PowerPoint
2011 can really save you a lot of time
| | 00:05 | when it comes to changing the look and
feel of your presentation, but what if
| | 00:08 | the theme you're looking for just isn't there?
| | 00:11 | Well in those cases, you can create
your own themes and save them so you can
| | 00:15 | use them in the future.
| | 00:16 | And that's what we're going to do
right now, continuing to work with our
| | 00:18 | NewHire presentation.
| | 00:20 | We've already applied a theme, but
let's start with something different.
| | 00:24 | We'll go to the Themes tab on the
Ribbon, make sure it's selected, and then go
| | 00:27 | down to the bottom-center of the themes
group, and just give it a click so we can
| | 00:32 | look at a wide variety of themes that
are available to you. They're built-in.
| | 00:36 | And to change the theme, it's just a
simple matter of clicking the desired theme
| | 00:40 | that you want to make use of.
| | 00:41 | So in this case let's go to one called Kilter.
| | 00:44 | You can see how that totally changes
the look and feel of our presentation.
| | 00:50 | Now, if it's not exactly what you're
looking for, you just got a head start.
| | 00:53 | You can start making some minor adjustments.
| | 00:55 | For example, let's go to the Colors
dropdown and choose a different color scheme.
| | 01:00 | We'll just scroll down and choose
something like Habitat, for example.
| | 01:03 | That might work for our company.
| | 01:06 | And then if you wanted to change the
background, you could click the Background.
| | 01:08 | Now the background is around the
outside of these graphics, so let's do
| | 01:12 | something like a nice gradient.
| | 01:14 | Go down here to this green one in the middle.
| | 01:17 | You can see the background
just got changed, ever so slightly.
| | 01:20 | It's a subtle change, but maybe
that's exactly what we needed.
| | 01:23 | Now it's time to save this and call it our own.
| | 01:26 | So we'll go to the Save Theme, not the
button, but click the dropdown so you can
| | 01:29 | see some of the options.
Right at the top is Save Theme.
| | 01:32 | That's the default, or you can save the
current theme that we just created as the Default.
| | 01:37 | So every time you create a new
presentation this is what you get.
| | 01:40 | But we do want Save Theme.
| | 01:42 | When we click this, we see the Save As,
and you can see NewHire2. That's the name
| | 01:46 | of our presentation.
| | 01:47 | If you're following along in the previous
lesson, you might still be using NewHire1.
| | 01:51 | But look where it's going.
| | 01:52 | It's going to something called My Themes,
and we're actually saving a theme here, the
| | 01:56 | extension being THMX.
| | 01:59 | So we can change the name here if
we wanted to. Let's call it TTOrientation.
| | 02:08 | It gives us a hint that we use this
for the Two Trees Olive Oil company for
| | 02:12 | the orientation, but we can use it for other
presentations now, as soon as we click Save.
| | 02:18 | And with the Themes tab still selected
on the Ribbon, you're going to be able to see it
| | 02:22 | here. Just click the dropdown button.
| | 02:24 | You can see this presentation.
| | 02:26 | You can see Custom as a new section here.
| | 02:28 | And any custom presentations that
appear here are the ones that you've made
| | 02:32 | changes to and saved.
| | 02:34 | So anytime we have a presentation now,
we can apply this TTOrientation theme to
| | 02:38 | it, because we're able to
save it in PowerPoint 2011.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing the background| 00:00 | Using themes in a presentation can
really add excitement to that presentation,
| | 00:05 | but if you want to tone it down a
little, and you don't see a theme that's
| | 00:08 | applicable, you can actually work
with the background on your own.
| | 00:11 | And that's we're going to do
right now, continuing to work with our
| | 00:14 | NewHire presentation.
| | 00:15 | The first thing we're going to
do though is remove the theme.
| | 00:18 | Well, in a way we're actually going
to change the theme by clicking the
| | 00:21 | Themes tab on the Ribbon.
| | 00:23 | Next we'll just click the dropdown
arrow, so we can see a list of all of our
| | 00:26 | themes. And the very first one under the
Built-In group is White, and that really
| | 00:30 | is kind of like having no theme at all.
| | 00:33 | So that is the default when you create
a new blank presentation. It is a white
| | 00:37 | background, and there are no graphics.
| | 00:39 | It's kind of like working from scratch.
| | 00:41 | Now it's time to adjust the
background. And you'll notice in the Theme
| | 00:45 | Options group in the Ribbon with the Themes
tab still selected, we have a Background button.
| | 00:49 | And when we click this, we're going to
see some presets, and you can choose from
| | 00:53 | these if you like, or you can go
directly to formatting the background. But if
| | 00:57 | you want to get a head start, maybe you
like one of the gradients that you see
| | 01:00 | here, like this one in the
bottom right-hand corner, Style 12,
| | 01:03 | I'll just select it, and it's
automatically applied to your presentation.
| | 01:07 | Now we can fiddle around with colors
and the gradient effect, for example.
| | 01:12 | So let's go to the Background button again.
| | 01:14 | This time we will select Format
Background, and instead of starting from scratch
| | 01:19 | here with nothing, you can see
your color is already selected.
| | 01:22 | We have some options across the top with
Fill selected, Solid, Gradient, Picture
| | 01:27 | or Texture, as well as Pattern.
| | 01:29 | So with Solid selected, let's change
the color. Maybe we like a dark green so
| | 01:34 | we'll go down to the very darkest
olive green Accent 3, Darker 50%.
| | 01:38 | So you can see what that
looks like on the first slide.
| | 01:42 | You would have to select Apply to All to
apply it to every slide in your presentation.
| | 01:46 | Clicking Apply will apply to the slide
you're looking at, in this case our first slide.
| | 01:50 | We can adjust the transparency of this
if we wanted to, if you're going to use
| | 01:54 | any graphics in the
background. Let's just leave it at zero.
| | 01:58 | Another option would be to add a little
excitement to that background, which is
| | 02:02 | currently solid, by using a gradient.
| | 02:05 | And we did see some presets earlier,
but now we can create our own, starting
| | 02:09 | with the style. Click the style. That's
currently showing None because we chose
| | 02:12 | a solid background.
| | 02:14 | We have a Linear, which will go
from top to bottom, or left to right;
| | 02:17 | Radial, which will radiate from the center out;
| | 02:20 | same thing for Rectangular
but in a rectangular shape;
| | 02:23 | Path you can choose the radiation;
| | 02:26 | and you can have it radiate out
from the title in your presentation.
| | 02:29 | I'll just go to Radial right now,
| | 02:31 | and you can see we can adjust the
angle, which is currently set to 0 degrees.
| | 02:35 | So if you look at it, it's actually
going from left to right here, and the
| | 02:39 | Direction is Upper Left Corner.
| | 02:41 | That's where it's all starting, but
if you wanted it to be centered, for
| | 02:44 | example, you could do that.
| | 02:46 | Automatically, a new color has been
added. There is our default color.
| | 02:50 | And in the Gradient window, we see, on the
left-hand side, an arrow that's selected.
| | 02:55 | There is another marker on the right-
hand side, which is not selected. So we want
| | 02:59 | to make changes like to the colors, for example.
| | 03:02 | Well, here on the left, we have our
color showing up as that dark green.
| | 03:05 | If we click the marker on the right,
you'll see it's white, and we can change
| | 03:10 | that. Let's choose perhaps a light green.
| | 03:13 | So it's going from a dark
green to a light green.
| | 03:15 | You can see it's going from the center.
| | 03:18 | If you'd rather it be light in the
center and dark in the edges, you can just
| | 03:21 | switch these markers around, and you can
adjust these by dragging them to a desired location.
| | 03:26 | You get more of an effect when they're
closer together and a more gradual effect
| | 03:31 | when you spread them out.
| | 03:32 | So that's not a bad effect right there.
| | 03:35 | You can even add additional colors.
Click the Add Color button. A new marker
| | 03:38 | appears, and now you could throw
in a third color if you needed to.
| | 03:41 | And you could add all kinds of markers if
you wanted to, to create a super effect.
| | 03:47 | So now you've got these three, and it's
just a subtle change that allows you to
| | 03:52 | really customize your background.
| | 03:54 | And that's not have it too light in the center.
| | 03:58 | We'll just move that left marker over a
little bit and the center one over there.
| | 04:04 | We want to be able to read the text.
| | 04:06 | So that's just an example of a gradient.
| | 04:09 | If you wanted to choose a picture, maybe
you've got your own picture you can use
| | 04:13 | that in the background or Choose From
Textures, which are kind of like pictures,
| | 04:17 | let's choose the From Texture button
dropdown by clicking the arrows, and you'll
| | 04:21 | see all the way from Newsprint down to
the bottom. There is an arrow that allows
| | 04:25 | you to scroll down to some Wood options.
| | 04:27 | So in our case maybe something like a
Canvas would be good, so we select Canvas.
| | 04:33 | You can see what that
looks like on the first slide.
| | 04:35 | And if you want to adjust the
transparency with that, you could turn the tiling
| | 04:39 | off, and you can see it's really just
a bitmap image that's tiled together to
| | 04:43 | create that canvas effect, so it
looks much better when it's tiled.
| | 04:46 | Let's choose something that is more
appropriate, something maybe like Green Marble.
| | 04:51 | That's a cool effect.
| | 04:52 | Now if you wanted to, you could
also choose patterns instead.
| | 04:56 | And a pattern, as the name implies, is a
number of different patterns to choose
| | 05:01 | from. You can see bricks.
| | 05:03 | You can see we've got all
kinds of cool stripes, and so on.
| | 05:06 | None of these really work for our
presentation, but you can change the
| | 05:09 | colors, and if you wanted to use some green
options here, for example, you could do that.
| | 05:13 | Well let's go back to Picture or
Texture, and we'll turn it back to that
| | 05:19 | Green Marble and choose Apply to All,
and it's applied to all of the slides
| | 05:23 | in our presentation.
| | 05:24 | So you really have full control over
your background by using the Background
| | 05:28 | button, kind of creating your own
look and feel for your presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Designing slides| 00:00 | When you design a presentation in
PowerPoint 2011, you have to consider your
| | 00:04 | audience and how you're going to be presenting.
| | 00:07 | Will it be on a big screen, will that
big screen be a wide screen, or will
| | 00:13 | you be simply converting it into a PDF
document that you will be sharing electronically?
| | 00:18 | Considering all of these different
options, you'll need to set up your pages, or
| | 00:22 | your slides, accordingly, and that's
what we're going to talk about right now,
| | 00:25 | continuing to work with our NewHire
presentation. And you'll notice with the
| | 00:30 | Themes tab selected, the very first
button is our Slide Size, under Page Setup.
| | 00:35 | And you can also go to the File menu and
find Page Setup there as well. Let's do that.
| | 00:42 | This opens up the Page Setup dialog box,
and you'll see your current size.
| | 00:45 | Our slides are sized for an on-screen show
using a widescreen (16:9), but we can click
| | 00:50 | this dropdown and see some different
options, like an on-screen show that's 4:3,
| | 00:54 | your standard definition.
| | 00:57 | Let's select that and see
what happens when we click OK.
| | 01:00 | You can see how our slides are changed,
and this is a more traditional look and feel.
| | 01:05 | Let's go back now, this time by
clicking the Slide Size button, and selecting
| | 01:10 | Page Setup from there.
| | 01:11 | Now we will go to Slides
sized for, and click the dropdown.
| | 01:15 | You will notice a number of the
options here include paper sizes, like Ledger
| | 01:19 | Paper; A4; Overhead;
| | 01:22 | there is the old 35mm Slides, if
that's what you're going to be creating;
| | 01:26 | a Banner; and you also have the ability
to create your own custom slide size.
| | 01:30 | So let's go back to an on-screen show,
and we'll flip it back to widescreen
| | 01:34 | 16:9, which is getting more popular.
| | 01:37 | Now you'll see the width that's created
for us: 10 inches wide and 5.63 inches
| | 01:42 | high, and we can change these settings.
Of course, we will be creating a custom
| | 01:46 | slide size then as soon as we do that.
| | 01:48 | Down below we have Orientation
options for both our slides and any notes,
| | 01:53 | handouts, and outlines that we might print.
| | 01:56 | The slides you can see
already selected is Landscape.
| | 01:59 | If we change it to Portrait,
| | 02:00 | you can see how these measurements
flip around. Really, our slide presentation
| | 02:05 | will be in an orientation fashion.
| | 02:07 | And our Notes, handouts and
outlines by default are set up as Portrait.
| | 02:12 | So if you are going to be creating
any handouts, you might want them to be
| | 02:16 | landscape as well to match your presentation.
| | 02:19 | If you're going to be printing out speaker
notes, probably you would want them portrait.
| | 02:22 | So portrait is a good option to
select for that particular scenario.
| | 02:26 | We will talk about headers and footers later on.
| | 02:29 | Let's click Options, though.
| | 02:30 | We can set up our Page Attributes by
saving this as a default. We won't do that.
| | 02:36 | We can format for any printer or a
specific printer that's connected to your
| | 02:40 | particular computer, and we can change the
paper size and orientation from here as well.
| | 02:46 | We will just click Cancel, which takes
us back to the original Page Setup window,
| | 02:50 | and to save our change, we will click OK.
| | 02:54 | So things have changed slightly
onscreen. Those Page Setup options are now
| | 02:58 | applied to our presentation, and it's
something to consider when you plan on
| | 03:02 | presenting, either using an onscreen
show or some other method, such as paper or
| | 03:08 | converting to a paper format
that might be shared electronically.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with slide layouts| 00:00 | Depending on what you plan on
displaying on any given slide in a presentation,
| | 00:05 | you want to make sure
that it's laid out properly.
| | 00:08 | Well there are number of different
slide layouts to choose from here in
| | 00:11 | PowerPoint 2011, so let's check them
out now using our NewHire presentation,
| | 00:16 | and we will go to slide number one.
| | 00:17 | Now slide layouts can be selected
when you add new slides or they can be
| | 00:22 | applied to existing slides, so let's
start by adding a new slide. And instead
| | 00:26 | of just clicking the New Slide button,
which will add the default slide layout
| | 00:30 | for us, let's check out our options by
clicking the dropdown arrow next to that button.
| | 00:36 | Here you'll see a number of different
layouts, with the current theme already
| | 00:40 | applied to the thumbnails.
| | 00:41 | Title Slide is what we see, our first
slide, which has a title and a subtitle, and
| | 00:47 | you'll notice that there are
spots reserved on the slide for those.
| | 00:52 | Next to that, we have Title and Content.
Many of the slides contain a title at
| | 00:56 | the top, and then you will see content
down below. It could be a bulleted list,
| | 00:59 | could be a picture, a movie, it could
be a table or a chart, for example.
| | 01:04 | Section headers we talked about in a
previous movie, and they allow you to create the
| | 01:08 | effect of sections in your presentation.
| | 01:10 | You can book content side by side.
| | 01:12 | You can have content with captions;
| | 01:14 | blank slides, if you want to start
from scratch and add your own elements;
| | 01:18 | Title Only, kind of like a blank slide
but allows you to enter your title in a
| | 01:24 | selected location and then use the
rest of the slide however you see fit;
| | 01:28 | Comparisons; Pictures with Captions;
you can see there are quite a few options
| | 01:32 | to choose from, and you really
should experiment with some of these.
| | 01:36 | We are going to go to our Title and
Content slide, which is the default when you
| | 01:41 | click the New Slide button, and
you'll see here we have placeholders for a
| | 01:45 | title, and we have the content area,
which allows us to click to add text or to
| | 01:51 | select from thumbnails for
different types of content.
| | 01:54 | So let's go up here where it says,
"Click to add title." We'll do that.
| | 01:57 | We will click, and we will
just type in "Ice-breaker."
| | 01:59 | Now down below, if we wanted it to be
text, we will just simply click to add text.
| | 02:10 | And the first bullet is created for us.
| | 02:12 | We just have to type in what that
first point is. "Meet and Greet." Press Enter.
| | 02:22 | There is your second bullet, and we
will just add one more here. Let's type in
| | 02:28 | "Game," just like that.
| | 02:30 | All right, so we now need to press Return
on the keyboard - that will start a new bullet.
| | 02:34 | All we need to do to deselect this text
box is to click anywhere outside of it,
| | 02:39 | and there is the end result.
| | 02:41 | So there is our new slide with our new layout.
| | 02:43 | Now let's go to a slide where we want to
change the layout. We'll just scroll down the
| | 02:47 | presentation till we get
to the Products section.
| | 02:51 | When you see Products you'll see our
section header here and then the next
| | 02:55 | slide, slide 12, contains a
title, and there is content.
| | 02:58 | There is our bulleted list.
| | 03:00 | And maybe we want to be able to show some
pictures of the products next to these bullets.
| | 03:04 | Well in that case, we want to change the layout.
| | 03:06 | So let's go to the Layout dropdown now,
here in the Slides group of the Home
| | 03:11 | tab. And now all we have to do is select them
those same layouts, and it will be changed for us.
| | 03:17 | Let's go to Two Content.
| | 03:19 | This could be a bulleted list on one
side and pictures on the other - perfect.
| | 03:23 | So we will select Two Content.
Right away, you can see our bulleted list is
| | 03:27 | squished over in the left-hand side,
and now we're ready, over here, to insert a
| | 03:32 | picture - maybe it's a movie, maybe it's a chart.
| | 03:36 | In our case, it's going to be picture.
| | 03:37 | We will talk about inserting pictures a
little bit later on, but now we have a
| | 03:40 | placeholder for that.
| | 03:41 | All we have to do is select the
appropriate thumbnail here to start doing that.
| | 03:47 | So you can create new slides and choose
those slide layouts on the fly, or if you
| | 03:52 | prefer, create your slides, get your
content in, and choose a layout afterwards.
| | 03:56 | It's totally up to you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with slide masters| 00:00 | When you need to make a change to a
group of slides - maybe it's every slide
| | 00:04 | in your presentation -
| | 00:06 | you don't want to have to go to each
individual slide and make that same change;
| | 00:10 | instead, you can use the masters,
allowing you to go to a single master slide
| | 00:15 | make one change that affects
every slide in your presentation.
| | 00:18 | We're going to look at masters right
now using our NewHire presentation, and
| | 00:22 | we're going to start by
opening up this brand-new view.
| | 00:26 | So we can do that by going to the
View menu and down to Master, and you'll
| | 00:30 | notice there are three choices.
| | 00:32 | You can make changes to your slide
master, representing the slides in your
| | 00:36 | presentation, audience
handouts, as well as speaker notes.
| | 00:40 | The other option is to click the
Themes tab on the Ribbon, and at the very far
| | 00:45 | right, you'll see the Edit Master button.
| | 00:47 | When you click this, you'll
have those same three options.
| | 00:50 | So let's go ahead and click that
button and choose Slide Master, which takes
| | 00:56 | us to a new view now.
| | 00:57 | So what you're seeing here, on the left
-hand side, in the Navigation pane, are
| | 01:00 | thumbnails for each of the
masters in your presentation.
| | 01:04 | The top thumbnail represents every
single slide in your presentation, and
| | 01:09 | regardless of layout.
| | 01:10 | So if you wanted to add a company logo,
for example, that appears in the top-
| | 01:14 | left corner of every slide, you'd do it here.
| | 01:16 | However, if you only wanted to make
changes to different slide layouts, you
| | 01:21 | would then select a different
layout, such as the one we see down here.
| | 01:24 | Just hover over the thumbnail;
| | 01:25 | you'll see this as a title slide.
| | 01:27 | If you select it and start making
changes to it, only title slides in your
| | 01:31 | presentation will show those changes.
| | 01:34 | The same thing goes for title and content,
and the rest of the layouts are available
| | 01:38 | to you down here as you
scroll through your presentation.
| | 01:43 | Let's say we do want to add the company
logo to top-left corner of every single slide.
| | 01:47 | We will make sure the top thumbnail is
selected, and this is our main master.
| | 01:52 | You can see it has
placeholders for titles, content,
| | 01:56 | there is also a footer, things like the date,
footer text, and page numbering, or slide numbers.
| | 02:02 | Those have to be turned on in your
presentation, but the placeholders are there for them.
| | 02:07 | So let's say we want that logo
to appear in the top-left corner.
| | 02:10 | Well all we do is insert the picture
where we want it, and we do that just as though we
| | 02:14 | were working on a regular slide.
| | 02:15 | So we will go to the Insert menu.
| | 02:18 | We will go down to Photo, and
we will choose Picture from File.
| | 02:22 | You'll find TwoTrees.
| | 02:23 | That's our English logo.
Click Insert, and it appears on the slide.
| | 02:28 | Notice it appears on every
slide master in the Navigation pane.
| | 02:32 | So we will just click once to select it,
and let's size it down by going to the
| | 02:35 | top-left corner with the double arrow.
Click and drag it down so it's tiny.
| | 02:41 | Now we will move to the center and
drag it up to the top-left corner so it's
| | 02:44 | subtle, but it's up there in
the top-left corner of our slide.
| | 02:48 | Now this is the master, so what we do here
affects every single slide in our presentation.
| | 02:54 | If we close this view - and we can do
that by repeating the steps by going up to
| | 02:59 | View, down to Master and selecting
Slide Master or with the Slide Master tab
| | 03:05 | selected here, you can click
the Close button or Close Master;
| | 03:09 | any one of those will close the masters -
| | 03:11 | take you back to your
presentation. Look at that.
| | 03:13 | We got a logo that appears up in the
top-left corner of every slide, and we
| | 03:17 | can't go into these slides and
delete those. They are there.
| | 03:20 | They are part of the background, and
that's because they are part of the master.
| | 03:26 | You can also create your own master
layouts and master sets of slides.
| | 03:31 | Let's go back to that view, by clicking
the Themes tab, and then click Edit Master
| | 03:36 | and choose Slide Master.
| | 03:37 | And you'll notice there are some
buttons in the Slide Master group.
| | 03:42 | We can create a new master and when you
do that, you get a whole list of master
| | 03:46 | slides, like we see down below.
| | 03:49 | If you only want to add one
master slide layout, it's a new layout.
| | 03:53 | So let's click the New Layout button.
| | 03:55 | You can see this gets added to the very bottom.
| | 03:58 | Now we'll have, as you can see, our
logo in the top-left corner, and we
| | 04:04 | can't remove that because it's part
of the main master, but we can make
| | 04:07 | changes to this layout.
| | 04:09 | For example, if we don't want the date,
you can click the border and then press
| | 04:13 | your Delete key on the keyboard.
| | 04:15 | We don't want the footer, if it's
turned on, to appear on this slide.
| | 04:17 | So we will delete it as well;
same thing goes for the page number.
| | 04:20 | Now maybe you want the
title to appear at the bottom.
| | 04:24 | We will just click, and we will drag it
down to the bottom of the slide, and we
| | 04:28 | want placeholders here for adding photos maybe.
| | 04:31 | This would just be kind of like a photo slide.
| | 04:33 | So in that case we want to insert
placeholders. Notice there is an Insert
| | 04:37 | Placeholder button. One allows you to
choose the content option, so it could
| | 04:42 | be any type of content, but if you
want it to specifically be pictures just
| | 04:46 | click the dropdown and choose Picture, and
then click and drag to draw the placeholder.
| | 04:52 | Let's add another one: click the
dropdown arrow picture, choose Picture.
| | 04:55 | We will do a bigger and
wider one over here in the right.
| | 05:01 | So this is our custom layout
that's been added now to our list.
| | 05:04 | And anything that we change here on
this particular master will affect all of
| | 05:09 | the slides using this layout.
| | 05:10 | So let's just close our view.
It returns us back to our presentation.
| | 05:15 | Now in this particular presentation, we
haven't added any slides that are simply
| | 05:21 | pictures, like that custom one.
| | 05:24 | So let's say we want to do
that after the Ice-breaker.
| | 05:27 | Go to the New Slide dropdown, and you will see
we do have a Custom Layout now. There it is.
| | 05:32 | You can choose Custom Layout.
| | 05:33 | It gets added, and you can see there
are placeholders for our pictures, and
| | 05:38 | there's the title down below.
| | 05:40 | So we will just click and
start adding those things.
| | 05:42 | So with slide masters you can save a
lot of time if you need to make changes
| | 05:46 | that affect groups of slides, or
every single slide in your presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using headers and footers| 00:00 | When there's static information that
needs to appear on every slide in a
| | 00:04 | presentation, you might consider making
changes to the slide master, like we did
| | 00:08 | in the previous movie. But if you need
that information to be updated, such as
| | 00:13 | slide numbers or dates for example,
and times, you might consider using
| | 00:18 | headers and footers, which are
available to you here in PowerPoint 2011.
| | 00:23 | We can use headers and footers on a
presentation, like our new Hire presentation
| | 00:27 | here, or we can also use headers and
footers on any audience handouts that we
| | 00:31 | might create, as well as our own speaker notes.
| | 00:34 | So let's take a look at that now.
| | 00:35 | To do it, we go up to the Insert
menu and down to Header and Footer.
| | 00:40 | Now from here we've got two options:
| | 00:43 | Slide, as well as Notes and Handouts.
| | 00:46 | When we go to Slide, you'll notice
that we can include dates and times, slide
| | 00:51 | numbers, and footer text.
| | 00:54 | If we go over to Notes and Handouts, we
get all of those options, plus a header
| | 00:58 | option, so you can have text, for
example, that appears at the top of every
| | 01:01 | single audience handout, or your
own speaker notes, for that matter.
| | 01:05 | Let's go back to Slide and focus there.
| | 01:08 | Let's say we don't need the date and time.
| | 01:11 | With it checked off, we can choose to
have it updated automatically, or we can
| | 01:15 | choose to have a fixed date
appearing in the bottom left-hand corner.
| | 01:19 | You can see that's where it is
with this particular master, and it's
| | 01:22 | highlighted in the preview.
| | 01:24 | If we want to update it automatically,
we could choose different formats as well.
| | 01:28 | Well, let's turn it off and not have
that appear on our slides, but Slide
| | 01:33 | numbers we do want showing up,
| | 01:34 | so we'll click that check box.
| | 01:36 | Now, it highlights that little
placeholder in the bottom right-hand corner.
| | 01:39 | Every slide will have the slide
number appearing there, if the slide master
| | 01:45 | has that placeholder.
| | 01:46 | So in this case, you can see, it's
going to the start at 1 - that's our first
| | 01:50 | slide - and if you didn't want it
actually showing up on your title slide, you
| | 01:54 | can turn it off by choosing the
Don't show on title slide check box.
| | 01:59 | So, it will only appear on
every slide after the title.
| | 02:01 | Same thing goes for the footer;
| | 02:03 | if you turn that on, you could type in
information like maybe the word 'confidential,'
| | 02:08 | so people know that when they're
looking at this presentation, the
| | 02:11 | information's confidential. It'll appear on every
slide, except for the title slide, as you can see.
| | 02:16 | Now, we'll click Apply to All.
| | 02:18 | The title slide doesn't change, but
when we go to the next slide in the
| | 02:21 | presentation, we see the word
'confidential,' and we see the number 2, and so on
| | 02:26 | as we move through the presentation.
| | 02:28 | Now, if you want to make changes to
the way that it appears - maybe a larger or
| | 02:31 | smaller font, a different font, a
different color - then you'd go into the slide
| | 02:35 | master. And we know that to do that,
we can go to the View menu and down to
| | 02:40 | Master and click Slide Master.
| | 02:44 | From here, you'll see the
placeholders for the dates and times.
| | 02:47 | There is the word 'Confidential,' now in
the footer text and the page numbering.
| | 02:51 | So you could go in there, for
example, and format that differently.
| | 02:55 | If you wanted it to be a little bit
bigger, you could double-click right on the
| | 02:58 | code itself to select it
like you would any other text.
| | 03:01 | Then go to the Home tab on your Ribbon
and maybe bump that up to say 14 points,
| | 03:07 | and maybe bold as well.
| | 03:09 | So you're formatting it here on the
master, so that it appears the same way on
| | 03:14 | every slide now when you go back.
| | 03:16 | So we'll just click Close Master.
It takes us back and you can see we've got a
| | 03:20 | bigger page number,
| | 03:21 | it's bolded now, and that is the case
for all of the slides except for the title
| | 03:25 | slide where we chose not to show it.
| | 03:28 | Now if you're going to be using
speaker notes or audience handouts, you can
| | 03:32 | adjust the exact same things on
those pages, including a header.
| | 03:35 | Let's just go back to Insert, down to
Header and Footer, and this time we'll
| | 03:41 | click Notes and Handouts.
| | 03:42 | You'll see we can have the date and time.
| | 03:45 | You can see where that shows up here;
| | 03:46 | it's on the top right-hand
corner, unless you change the master.
| | 03:50 | Choose the format. And maybe page number,
instead of slide number, should be kept
| | 03:56 | on in the bottom right-hand
corner, and let's add a header.
| | 04:00 | We'll just type in 'Two Trees, '
When we'll click Apply to All,
| | 04:06 | now if we're going to print out any
audience handouts or our own speaker notes, all
| | 04:11 | of that information will appear
exactly where we turned it on.
| | 04:15 | So with headers and footers, similar
to working with masters, you can have
| | 04:18 | consistent content showing up on every
slide in your presentation without having
| | 04:23 | to update them manually.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using and creating templates| 00:00 | Templates allow you to create new
presentations with a lot of the formatting
| | 00:05 | and the design created for you, with
placeholders telling you where to place
| | 00:08 | text so it looks great.
| | 00:11 | What you can also do in PowerPoint 2011
is create your own templates, and that's
| | 00:15 | what we're going to do right now,
using our NewHire8 presentation.
| | 00:19 | It's got a different theme that's
being used here, some different content.
| | 00:24 | As you create your presentations, you
may realize, down the road, you need to
| | 00:27 | reuse this presentation,
maybe with updated information.
| | 00:30 | In that case, it's an ideal
candidate for creating a template.
| | 00:34 | Let's start though, by looking at some of
the templates that are available to you
| | 00:37 | by clicking File and then New from Template.
| | 00:40 | Now anytime you go to create a new
presentation, by default, you are going
| | 00:44 | to see this Presentation gallery, and
under Templates, you'll probably see
| | 00:48 | all selected, allowing you to view
all of the templates that are available
| | 00:52 | to you here in PowerPoint.
| | 00:53 | As you hover over the thumbnails,
you'll see some of the slides, using that
| | 00:57 | particular template.
| | 00:59 | If you go to My Templates, you should
see nothing if you've never created a
| | 01:02 | template in PowerPoint.
| | 01:04 | That's all going to change.
| | 01:05 | So let's click Cancel. And with our
NewHire presentation, we'll create a
| | 01:09 | brand-new template from this.
| | 01:11 | So all we do is go up to File and Save As;
| | 01:15 | it's as simple as that.
| | 01:16 | We're going to change the format.
| | 01:18 | So it won't be a presentation.
| | 01:19 | It would be an actual template.
| | 01:22 | To do that, we go to Format dropdown,
and we choose a template format.
| | 01:27 | You can choose the new format that's
used in PowerPoint 2008 and 2011 - POTX with
| | 01:33 | the new XML extension - or you can go
back to previous versions of templates,
| | 01:38 | going back to PowerPoint 97-2004, if
you think that you'll be allowing people
| | 01:43 | who have yet to upgrade to
use this particular template.
| | 01:47 | Well, let's choose PowerPoint Template POTX.
| | 01:49 | Look what happens right away.
| | 01:51 | The location is changed to the My
Templates folder, and I'll show you where that
| | 01:55 | is momentarily in case you
want to delete templates. That's where it goes.
| | 01:58 | You might want to change the name from
NewHire8, the name of our presentation,
| | 02:02 | to just NewHire Template, maybe.
| | 02:08 | Now when you click Save, it will
be saved to that default location.
| | 02:11 | You really don't want to fiddle with
the location because when you go back
| | 02:15 | to create your new presentation, you'll go
to My Templates, and you'll see it there;
| | 02:19 | you won't have to search for it.
| | 02:20 | Notice that we are now
working on the template itself.
| | 02:23 | POTX is the extension.
| | 02:25 | Any changes we make now to what we
see here will be changing the actual
| | 02:29 | template, not the original presentation.
| | 02:32 | Let's just minimize this for a second.
| | 02:35 | I want to show you in Finder exactly where
you're going to find your NewHire Template.
| | 02:42 | As we scroll back here, you'll
notice it's quite a lengthy path.
| | 02:45 | It's hidden away. First of
all, on your own hard drive,
| | 02:49 | in the Users folder, you'll look for your
own username. Then you'll go to Library.
| | 02:54 | From there, under Library, you'll
select Application Support. Then select
| | 02:59 | Microsoft, then Office, and you
can see this list really goes on.
| | 03:04 | From Office, you'll choose User
Templates, then My Templates, and that's
| | 03:07 | where you'll see it.
| | 03:08 | I only show you this because if you need to
delete a template, this is where you go to find it.
| | 03:13 | Just right-click and move it to the
trash if you don't want it anymore.
| | 03:16 | But we're not going to do that;
| | 03:17 | we're going to test this out.
| | 03:18 | So we're going back to PowerPoint.
| | 03:23 | This is the template.
| | 03:24 | We're going to close it up, and we'll go back
up to File now, and choose New from Template.
| | 03:29 | So let's say, a couple of months later,
we're going to do another orientation.
| | 03:32 | We'll make sure My Templates is
selected, so you might see All by default.
| | 03:38 | There is NewHire Template right there.
| | 03:40 | You'll also see it under
My Templates, all by itself.
| | 03:43 | You'll click Choose.
| | 03:44 | Now, you've created a brand-new
presentation using the template.
| | 03:49 | Notice the name at the top;
| | 03:50 | you'll see Presentation and then a
number next to it, representing a brand-new
| | 03:55 | presentation that has yet to be saved.
| | 03:57 | So you can go in here and
start making changes to it.
| | 04:00 | For example, where it says December 2010,
you might change December to January,
| | 04:09 | and it might be 2011.
| | 04:13 | And then you continue through the
various slides, making those updates, and then
| | 04:16 | of course, when you go to Save,
clicking the Save button assumes that you want
| | 04:21 | to save this new presentation, and you
get to choose your location and your name,
| | 04:25 | because you have created a brand-new
presentation using one of your templates.
| | 04:29 | We'll just click Cancel.
| | 04:30 | Hopefully, you can see the time saving
that can be accomplished using a template.
| | 04:35 | If you find yourself updating your
presentations on a regular basis to reuse
| | 04:40 | them, why not create a template from it and
| | 04:42 | save yourself a lot of time?
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Working with TextAdding text with text slides and boxes| 00:00 | Probably the most popular content
you'll ever find on any given slide in a
| | 00:04 | presentation is text,
| | 00:06 | so we're going to talk
about working with text boxes.
| | 00:09 | Some text boxes appear
automatically on various slide layouts.
| | 00:14 | If you're following along with me,
you might just want to go up to the File
| | 00:17 | menu and start a New Presentation,
which gives you this blank presentation.
| | 00:22 | You can see one thumbnail over
here in the left, and a title slide.
| | 00:25 | In the title slide master, you can see it has
in the background, a couple of placeholders:
| | 00:30 | one for a title, and one for a subtitle.
| | 00:33 | In this case, because they are
placeholders are on the master, you simply click
| | 00:36 | inside to add your text. So let's do that.
| | 00:39 | We'll click inside the title slide,
and we'll just type in a title:
| | 00:43 | "A Tale of Two Trees."
| | 00:49 | Now we'll do the same for the subtitle,
which is formatted a little bit differently.
| | 00:53 | Again, we click inside the placeholder,
and we'll just type in 'Orientation 2010.'
| | 01:03 | So that's all there is to a text
box is getting the text in there.
| | 01:06 | We'll click off the slide to deselect
that text box, to see the end result.
| | 01:11 | Now it really doesn't matter how we
change the slide, as far as formatting goes.
| | 01:15 | For example, if we go to the Themes
tab, and we select one of the themes we
| | 01:19 | created in the previous chapter,
| | 01:21 | you can see the text boxes are still there;
| | 01:23 | they're just formatted differently.
| | 01:25 | You can see the fonts, the colors, et cetera.
| | 01:29 | All of that stuff has changed
as well, but our text remains.
| | 01:32 | Now when need to go to add a new slide -
| | 01:35 | we can do that by going to
the Home tab on the Ribbon,
| | 01:38 | click the New Slide dropdown -
| | 01:39 | you'll see many of these slides
contain text boxes. Title and Content,
| | 01:44 | so there will be a title again,
another text box placeholder, and the content
| | 01:48 | itself could also be text,
such as a bulleted list.
| | 01:51 | Same thing goes for
Section Headers. Two Content,
| | 01:54 | again, the content could be text in
either of these two placeholders.
| | 02:00 | Same thing goes for Comparison, Title Only.
| | 02:02 | Blank doesn't have any placeholder,
so you'd have to add your own.
| | 02:05 | So let's click Blank.
| | 02:06 | We have a new blank slide here.
| | 02:09 | There are no placeholders
for adding our own text.
| | 02:11 | If you want to do that, you
simply add your own text box.
| | 02:14 | You can do that, again, from
the Home tab on the Ribbon.
| | 02:17 | You'll see over in the Insert
group, there is a Text Box button.
| | 02:21 | When you click this, there
are many options to choose from.
| | 02:24 | We can insert WordArt, so it's hooked
into Microsoft Word where you can create
| | 02:30 | this graphical text.
| | 02:31 | There are headers and footers, dates
and times, slide numbers. All those things
| | 02:35 | that we see on the slide master,
| | 02:37 | we can turn them on directly from here.
| | 02:39 | But right at the top is Text Box.
| | 02:42 | So when we click this, we're now
ready to either click and start typing or
| | 02:46 | click and drag to create our text box.
| | 02:48 | So let's say we just wanted it
over here in the center at the top.
| | 02:52 | Click and drag over to the right.
| | 02:54 | Create the size you want.
| | 02:55 | When you release, you'll see it's
resized for you automatically to match the
| | 03:00 | font that is selected here,
| | 03:01 | in this case, Rockwell,
with this particular theme.
| | 03:05 | You can see the size here as well.
| | 03:06 | Of course, all of these features can be changed.
| | 03:09 | But let's just type in a little bit of text.
| | 03:11 | We'll type in 'Ice-Breaker.'
| | 03:17 | Again, we'll click off the
slide to see the end result.
| | 03:21 | So, many of the slide layouts themselves
have placeholders for adding text and text boxes.
| | 03:26 | But in those cases where you need to
add additional text, or you choose a
| | 03:30 | slide that has no placeholder, you can
always insert your own text boxes to add
| | 03:34 | your own text.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding text to a shape| 00:00 | When you insert a text box,
automatically you have a rectangle that allows you
| | 00:05 | to type the text inside.
| | 00:07 | The rectangle itself really
doesn't have any properties:
| | 00:10 | There is no border visible. There is no fill.
| | 00:13 | It's just a standard text box.
| | 00:15 | But you can actually add text to any
shape that you insert into a slide, and
| | 00:19 | that's we're going to do now.
| | 00:20 | We're still working with our
Orientation presentation that we started in
| | 00:23 | the previous lesson.
| | 00:25 | Here on this blank slide, we typed in some text,
| | 00:28 | but it might look better if it
were inside something a little more
| | 00:31 | interesting, such as a shape.
| | 00:33 | With the Home tab selected on the Ribbon,
you'll notice, in the Insert group, you
| | 00:37 | do have a Shape button.
| | 00:39 | When you click this, you're
going to see a list of groups.
| | 00:41 | As you move down through those groups,
such as rectangles, you'll see different
| | 00:45 | types of rectangles to choose from,
| | 00:47 | basic shapes as well.
| | 00:49 | Then we get down to block
arrows, equations, and so on.
| | 00:53 | Let's go all the way down to Stars and Banners.
| | 00:55 | We'll choose one of the banners here.
| | 00:58 | For example, this third
one in the second last row:
| | 01:01 | it's Curved Up Ribbon; that's the name.
| | 01:03 | When we click it, we now go to the
slide and click and drag to draw it.
| | 01:07 | So we'll start over here in the left corner.
| | 01:11 | We'll click and drag across and down,
until we get the desired shape and size.
| | 01:15 | When you release, you've
actually inserted the shape.
| | 01:18 | Now to add the text, you just
double-click inside the shape itself.
| | 01:22 | So we'll just double-click.
| | 01:23 | It's very hard to see where the cursor
is because of the particular formatting
| | 01:28 | with this shape, but all you
have to do is start typing now.
| | 01:31 | Let's type in 'Ice-Breaker.'
| | 01:37 | You can see it's the same font, the
same size as the text we typed earlier in a
| | 01:42 | plain old text box, but
now it's inside the shape.
| | 01:44 | Of course, we can format that,
which we will do in the next movie.
| | 01:48 | Just before we do that, we might as
well remove the text box we added in the
| | 01:52 | previous movie, since we
now have it inside a shape.
| | 01:54 | So we'll just click anywhere in that text box.
| | 01:57 | You'll notice there is the border we were
talking about, the shape and size of our text box.
| | 02:02 | Just click the border, so it's
selected, and not the actual text inside.
| | 02:06 | Press your Delete key on
the keyboard, and it's gone.
| | 02:09 | Now you're left with the shape with our text
inside, which definitely needs some formatting.
| | 02:14 | That's what we're going to talk about next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting text on a slide| 00:00 | When you add text to a slide using the
placeholders that are there already for
| | 00:04 | you in a slide layout and as part of
a theme, typically the formatting of
| | 00:09 | that text is taking care of.
| | 00:11 | It'll always be the right size.
| | 00:12 | It'll always look right, be
the right color, et cetera.
| | 00:15 | But when you start adding your own
text, using your own text boxes, or even
| | 00:20 | using a shape, for example, like we did
in the previous movie, you may need to
| | 00:23 | format the text to look proper.
| | 00:26 | That's what we're going to do using
our Orientation presentation here.
| | 00:29 | We do have a shape with some text inside.
| | 00:32 | You can see the text is way too small for
the shape, and it's not the best color either.
| | 00:37 | So there are some options
for formatting this text.
| | 00:40 | The first step though, is to select that text.
| | 00:43 | We'll just go inside the text area.
| | 00:44 | Click once, and you'll notice the
entire shape is selected, because we've added
| | 00:48 | the text to a shape.
| | 00:49 | This could apply to a text box
as well, what we're doing here.
| | 00:53 | But because it's a shape, we have some
formatting options that are going to appear.
| | 00:57 | Notice on the Ribbon, in between the
Home and the Themes tab is a Format tab.
| | 01:01 | When we click this, we're going to see
formatting options for the shape, which
| | 01:05 | include formatting the text for us.
| | 01:07 | For example, you'll see here in the
Shape Styles group, we've got a number of
| | 01:12 | different options to choose from.
| | 01:13 | They're all presets.
| | 01:14 | We click the little dropdown arrow,
and you can see there are quite a large
| | 01:18 | number of options to choose from.
| | 01:20 | So if we wanted to choose one of these
green options in the very bottom right-hand
| | 01:23 | corner, you can see it changes the
shape, and the text inside remains the same.
| | 01:29 | Now let's go back to this and choose
something different; maybe something with a
| | 01:33 | border around it would be better.
Yeah, that's not bad.
| | 01:35 | But you can see the text
inside hasn't really changed.
| | 01:39 | So let's click and drag across the text.
| | 01:42 | You can go from the right-
hand side or the left-hand side.
| | 01:44 | It's totally up to you.
| | 01:45 | I'm going to click and drag to select all of it.
| | 01:47 | We also have some options for text styles.
| | 01:51 | You can see there is this little
window here with the dropdown of its own.
| | 01:54 | When we click that arrow, you're going
to see a number of formatting options
| | 01:58 | that are applied to our selected text.
| | 02:01 | You can also see we can choose to apply
the formatting to all text in the shape.
| | 02:07 | So in this case, we already selected the text,
| | 02:09 | so it doesn't matter which one we choose.
| | 02:11 | So we've got the green background.
Maybe something that will stand out might be
| | 02:15 | something gold, for example.
| | 02:17 | Choose one of those.
| | 02:18 | You can see now it's very difficult to
notice the change, just because it's still
| | 02:23 | selected, and it's not very big.
| | 02:24 | So we'll click off the slide.
| | 02:26 | Now it that does look better,
but we do have some work to do.
| | 02:29 | So we'll go back inside, and we'll
click and drag across the text again.
| | 02:33 | This time though, we're
not going to use the presets.
| | 02:36 | We're going to go back to the Home tab,
because there is a whole group here,
| | 02:40 | under Font, that allows us to
change the font face, the font size,
| | 02:45 | you can see it's defaulted to 18 points here.
| | 02:47 | So we can click this dropdown and
choose something different, like 20:
| | 02:50 | it gets a little bit bigger. Or we
could use the up arrow and down arrow to
| | 02:54 | increase or decrease the font size.
| | 02:57 | Let's just bump it up until it fits nicely.
| | 02:59 | You can see that's getting pretty
close to the borders. It is bolded.
| | 03:03 | We can tell because the
Bold button is depressed.
| | 03:06 | So all of these attributes
are at our fingertips as well.
| | 03:09 | We can turn Bold off by clicking it.
| | 03:11 | We could try Underline by
clicking it. Don't like it?
| | 03:14 | Click it again to turn it off.
| | 03:17 | We can also change the color
of our font if we wanted to.
| | 03:20 | So the font color is
currently a yellowish color,
| | 03:23 | but we can go to maybe a bright
yellow, and it's going to stand out.
| | 03:27 | We can also choose from some of those styles
that we saw using the Format tab on the Ribbon.
| | 03:32 | They're also available to us here.
| | 03:33 | So if you want to go back to something,
you can see that makes it so it has to
| | 03:37 | wrap around. And it doesn't look great like that,
| | 03:40 | so we'll select it again.
| | 03:42 | We'll just bump the size
down until it fits perfectly.
| | 03:45 | Now we'll just deselect it by
clicking off the slide to see the end
| | 03:49 | result. It looks pretty good.
| | 03:51 | All right, let's go back inside, and
select our text again by clicking and
| | 03:55 | dragging, because under Paragraph, we
also have some options that we'll apply to
| | 03:59 | our text; for example, the alignment.
| | 04:01 | Right now, you can see the
Center Alignment button is selected.
| | 04:05 | So if you want it on the left-hand side or
the right-hand side, you could select those.
| | 04:10 | There is not a whole lot of
room between the borders here,
| | 04:12 | so it's a very subtle change.
Or you can choose Justify Text.
| | 04:16 | If you've got paragraph text, it's
going to go from border to border.
| | 04:20 | With a single line though,
Center is the best option,
| | 04:22 | so we'll go back to that.
| | 04:24 | All right, let's see what that
looks like by clicking off the slide.
| | 04:27 | Everything is deselected now.
| | 04:29 | I'm not crazy about the color here.
| | 04:31 | It doesn't really go with our background.
| | 04:32 | So we'll select the symbol this time - not
the text - and go back to the Format tab.
| | 04:38 | Although we're not going to fiddle
around with the text, we can still choose
| | 04:41 | some options for our shape styles.
| | 04:43 | We'll go back to this little dropdown.
| | 04:45 | Let's go back to something nice and gold.
| | 04:49 | Go to the third one in the
bottom row. That looks pretty good,
| | 04:54 | but we do need to change our text color now.
| | 04:57 | We have some additional options
here in the Text Styles group.
| | 05:01 | So we've got the preset styles.
| | 05:03 | It's a good head start, if you wanted to.
| | 05:05 | Let's go to one of these greens.
And if you want to change the fill color or the
| | 05:10 | line color yourself, you could do that as well.
| | 05:12 | There are also some effects.
| | 05:14 | We'll click the dropdown.
| | 05:15 | Maybe a reflection would be cool.
| | 05:17 | Let's try the Medium Reflection,
4 points. You can see that.
| | 05:21 | That looks nice.
| | 05:22 | We'll deselect, and there
is our finished product.
| | 05:26 | So you have a number of formatting options
| | 05:28 | once you've got the text in there.
And if you haven't used one of the
| | 05:32 | placeholders that are part of a slide
layout, or maybe part of the theme, you
| | 05:36 | may need to do some formatting yourself.
| | 05:38 | You have all of the tools necessary
to do that here in PowerPoint 2011.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing character direction| 00:00 | When we add text to a slide - whether it
be inside a text box, a placeholder, or
| | 00:05 | even inside a shape - by default, that
text is going to flow from left to right.
| | 00:09 | That is the default, but it can be
changed, and there are scenarios where you'll
| | 00:13 | want to be able to do that.
| | 00:14 | We're going to take a look at a couple of them now.
| | 00:17 | With our Orientation
presentation, we're going to simply add a new
| | 00:20 | blank slide by clicking the New Slide
dropdown, and we'll click Blank, and there it is.
| | 00:25 | We've got a blank slide, and now we'll add a shape.
| | 00:27 | We've done this already.
| | 00:28 | We'll click the Shape button, go down
to Block Arrows, and we'll select the
| | 00:32 | third arrow, which is the up arrow, and
now we'll just click and drag across and
| | 00:37 | down, so it almost fills the entire slide.
| | 00:40 | So there's our shape, and we
already know to get text inside, we just
| | 00:43 | double-click anywhere inside
the shape and start typing.
| | 00:48 | So we'll type in 'Go For Gold,'
and you can see, there it is.
| | 00:54 | It's going from left to right, it is
centered, and it's the default font and
| | 00:58 | size, but all of that can
be changed. We know that.
| | 01:01 | Now, if we were to go up to the Ribbon,
with the Format tab selected, you will
| | 01:05 | find a Rotate button. And if we click
this Rotate button and rotate it left by
| | 01:11 | 90 degrees, look what happens.
| | 01:14 | It's the entire shape and our text
that's rotated, and we only want to
| | 01:18 | rotate the text maybe.
| | 01:20 | So, we'll undo that by clicking the Undo
button, and we'll select the text now first.
| | 01:26 | So inside, we'll just click and drag
across our text so it's all selected.
| | 01:30 | We're not going back to that Rotate button;
| | 01:31 | instead, we're going to go to the
Home tab on the Ribbon, because in
| | 01:35 | the Paragraph group,
| | 01:36 | you will find a button for
changing your Text Direction.
| | 01:40 | Horizontal appears at the top, and it's checked;
| | 01:42 | that is our default.
| | 01:44 | We can rotate it clockwise.
| | 01:46 | We can rotate it counterclockwise.
| | 01:47 | We can even stack it, so it
goes from the top to the bottom;
| | 01:51 | we just read from the top down.
| | 01:53 | So let's start with Rotate Counterclockwise.
Here it is. It's rotated counterclockwise.
| | 01:59 | We have to turn our heads to
be able to read it a little bit.
| | 02:01 | We can bump up the size. It fills
our shape a little bit better.
| | 02:05 | We'll go up to 44 points and just
click off the slide to see the end result
| | 02:10 | clearly, without any handles, and so on.
| | 02:12 | So that's not too bad.
| | 02:14 | There are some more options, though.
| | 02:16 | Go back inside. Now when we click and
drag, we'll click and drag from the top
| | 02:20 | to the bottom or bottom to the top to
select our text, and let's try the other
| | 02:24 | one, which is Stacked.
| | 02:25 | Now, when we do that, it doesn't
quite all fit on a single line, but notice
| | 02:30 | we're reading from top to
bottom and left to right.
| | 02:34 | So if we wanted to just drop the size
down until it all fits on one line, there
| | 02:38 | it is. But really, if you deselect,
it fits inside the arrow vertically.
| | 02:44 | There's a lot of extra
space on the left and the right.
| | 02:47 | Wouldn't it be nice if it fit just right?
| | 02:49 | Well, there are some
additional options we can look at.
| | 02:52 | Let's back inside, click and
drag over our text, go to the Text
| | 02:56 | Direction dropdown;
| | 02:57 | this time we're going to
select Text Direction Options.
| | 03:00 | This opens up our Format Text window
with Text Box selected, and we have all
| | 03:06 | those options for alignment.
| | 03:07 | There is our Text
direction. Stacked is selected.
| | 03:10 | There is the Order of the lines, Left
to right, but it's only one line, so we
| | 03:13 | don't have to worry about that.
| | 03:15 | The only other option is right to left anyway.
| | 03:17 | You'll notice there's
something else here called Autofit.
| | 03:20 | If we want to resize our shape so it fits our
text, that's a great option. We'll select it.
| | 03:25 | The other option is to resize text to
fit your shape, and we can set margins
| | 03:29 | within our shape as well,
| | 03:31 | so if we want to bump these up.
On the Left and Right, it's only 0.1.
| | 03:34 | We'll just bump it up to half inch.
And you can see in the background here our
| | 03:38 | shape is growing a little bit.
| | 03:41 | We'll bump up the right side as well.
| | 03:43 | We'll leave the top and bottom as is,
And Wrap text in the shape, that we saw
| | 03:49 | happen when we got a little bit too big.
| | 03:51 | So we'll click OK, and now
we'll deselect, and look at that.
| | 03:55 | That's a much better fit.
| | 03:56 | So we've got our text.
| | 03:58 | It's changed direction, so it's stacked,
going from top to bottom. The arrow is
| | 04:01 | pointing up, and it fits perfectly.
| | 04:04 | Just some of the options when it comes
to changing the direction of your text in
| | 04:08 | a slide here in PowerPoint 2011.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating lists using bullets and numbering| 00:00 | Sometimes, a text you place on a
slide in PowerPoint needs to be a list of
| | 00:04 | points, or maybe a list that
needs to appear in a certain order.
| | 00:09 | In those cases, you want to take
advantage of the list functionality in
| | 00:12 | PowerPoint for creating bulleted or
numbered lists, and that's what we're
| | 00:16 | going to do right now.
| | 00:17 | We're going to start with our
TwoTrees5 presentation here.
| | 00:21 | We're looking at the title slide. And
if we go to the New Slide dropdown, and
| | 00:26 | we go to any of the slides that have content,
such as Title and Content and click there,
| | 00:32 | you'll notice that down below,
where it says Click to add text, you're
| | 00:35 | automatically creating a bullet.
| | 00:37 | When you click in there and start typing,
you're actually creating your first bullet.
| | 00:42 | So let's say you want to type in
your own name and press Return:
| | 00:47 | you get the second bullet.
| | 00:48 | But we actually don't need the slide,
so we'll just click the thumbnail on the
| | 00:52 | left-hand side and press your Delete key.
| | 00:56 | Now, if you look at the next slide
that actually appears in our presentation
| | 00:59 | with the Introductions, you can see
there's an order here: your name, your
| | 01:03 | hometown, favorite olive oil, job position.
| | 01:06 | All of these items should be listed,
and they could be either bullets or
| | 01:10 | numbered, because in this case,
there is a certain order to follow.
| | 01:13 | So I'll just click and drag across all
that text, so you don't have type it in.
| | 01:18 | It's already there. And to create a
bulleted list, simply go up to the Home tab
| | 01:23 | on your Ribbon, in the Paragraph group,
you'll see two buttons there: one for
| | 01:27 | creating a bulleted list,
the other, a numbered list.
| | 01:30 | Each of these buttons also has a
dropdown so you can choose different styles.
| | 01:34 | So let's start just by
clicking the Bulleted List button.
| | 01:37 | This gives us those default bullets
we saw when we created a brand-new
| | 01:41 | slide with content.
| | 01:42 | Click the button again.
| | 01:43 | It turns the bullets off.
| | 01:46 | Maybe it should be a numbered list.
We'll click the Numbered List button, and
| | 01:49 | here you can see now
they're ordered: 1, 2, 3, 4.
| | 01:52 | Click that button, and it toggles off.
| | 01:55 | Let's go to the dropdown next to
Bullets now and look at some of the bullet
| | 01:58 | styles you can choose from,
| | 01:59 | so if you want to spice it up a
little bit; for example, check marks.
| | 02:03 | This would apply to such a list
where we have to check off each item.
| | 02:07 | Or if we go to the Numbered List
dropdown, you'll notice different numbering
| | 02:11 | styles as well: with periods, without,
with round brackets, circled numbers, we
| | 02:16 | even have Roman numerals if you want to do that.
| | 02:19 | Let's leave it at Roman numerals, and
we'll just scroll down our list of slides
| | 02:23 | here until we get into the History
section, and you'll see slide number 6 has
| | 02:28 | the management team.
| | 02:29 | Here's an example where we're going to
use a bulleted list, and some of these
| | 02:33 | people are actually subordinates of others.
| | 02:35 | So we're going to talk about indenting as well.
| | 02:38 | So let's just go inside here.
| | 02:40 | We'll just click and drag across all
of the names, so they're all highlighted.
| | 02:43 | We'll go to the Bulleted List dropdown, and
let's just choose something like the diamonds.
| | 02:49 | So, we've got a list of names here.
| | 02:52 | Let's say Tony and Andrew
are subordinates of Maria.
| | 02:55 | Well, in that case, we could select
those two, by clicking and dragging again, and
| | 03:00 | use the Indent button, which
is in the Paragraph group.
| | 03:04 | This allows us to increase the indent.
| | 03:06 | Right now, we can't decrease it,
because we're at the first level.
| | 03:09 | Click Increase Indent, and you can see
there's a style applied to our bullet here.
| | 03:13 | Click it again and you go to the third
level, which is a mistake, so you can go
| | 03:17 | back by using the Decrease Indent.
| | 03:19 | By the way, the keyboard
shortcuts for this are Tab and Shift+Tab.
| | 03:24 | Let's say Andy Young is a
subordinate of Jimmy Vitalia.
| | 03:28 | So we'll just click.
| | 03:29 | We don't have to select the name
because it's only one, and we'll increase that
| | 03:33 | indent, and now we've got our
bulleted list appearing the way we want.
| | 03:37 | And of course, you can go in and make
changes to the bullet and number styles as
| | 03:41 | well, aside from those presets we saw.
| | 03:43 | Let's just click and drag across the
whole thing now, and we'll go up to the
| | 03:49 | dropdown next to our bulleted list.
| | 03:51 | This is shorter than
going up to the Format menu.
| | 03:53 | When you click Define New Bullet,
it's going to open up the Format Text
| | 03:57 | window here, with Bullets and Numbering already
selected. And you can see your current selection.
| | 04:02 | We have the style for
Bullets already selected here;
| | 04:05 | Numbering also appears up here.
| | 04:07 | If we want to change the color, the size, or
even create a custom bullet, we could do that.
| | 04:12 | Let's start with the custom bullet.
| | 04:13 | You'll see some presets to choose from.
| | 04:15 | You can go and select your own characters.
| | 04:17 | You can even choose the pictures.
| | 04:19 | If you had a little picture of yourself,
for example, that could go next to your name,
| | 04:23 | that would be an option.
| | 04:24 | Let's just try one of these 3D check boxes here.
| | 04:28 | It now becomes the selected one.
| | 04:30 | If you want to change the
color, you can do that as well.
| | 04:33 | Let's go to a nice, dark
olive green and click OK.
| | 04:37 | You can see, there it is.
| | 04:38 | It's the same size as the text, in
other words, 100%, and that was another
| | 04:44 | option. If we go back to the
dropdown and click Define New Bullet,
| | 04:48 | if you wanted the bullets to be a little
bit smaller than the font size, you can
| | 04:52 | just click the down arrow or type in a figure.
| | 04:56 | We'll go down to 90 and click OK.
| | 04:58 | Now the bullets are slightly smaller
than the text, and of course, you can make
| | 05:01 | them larger if you wanted to;
| | 05:03 | it's totally up to you.
| | 05:05 | We'll deselect to see the
end result; it looks pretty good.
| | 05:08 | So, when you need to create order for a list
of items, you might consider a numbered list.
| | 05:13 | If there are point forms, list
items that need to be bulleted,
| | 05:17 | you also have Bullet options.
| | 05:19 | They're all available to you
here using the Bulleted and Numbered List
| | 05:22 | functionality here in PowerPoint.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing spacing and indents| 00:00 | Indenting text is not only reserved
for bulleted or numbered lists; it also
| | 00:05 | applies to paragraph text. And the
other adjustment we can make to make text
| | 00:09 | easier to read is to adjust the spacing.
| | 00:11 | We're going to look at those two
things now using our TwoTrees presentation.
| | 00:17 | We left off looking at the Management
Team, but we are going to go to slide
| | 00:19 | number 5, where we see a paragraph
of text under the title, Our Story.
| | 00:24 | In this case, we're using the Title
and Content layout, and in this case
| | 00:29 | the layout is text.
| | 00:31 | Now, whoever typed this in typed it in
and a bullet was created automatically.
| | 00:35 | So that's something we can turn off.
| | 00:37 | So let's go inside this paragraph and
click and drag to select the entire paragraph.
| | 00:42 | You'll notice you can't drag over the bullet.
| | 00:44 | All you can do now is turn that off by
going up to the Paragraph group, with the
| | 00:48 | Home tab selected on your Ribbon, and
click Bulleted List. That turns it off.
| | 00:52 | So you can see what happened.
| | 00:54 | There was a little bit of space before
and after the bullet, and that's part
| | 00:58 | of the indentation.
| | 01:00 | But we can also adjust the indentation
for an entire paragraph by going into the
| | 01:05 | Paragraph group here on the Ribbon, and
you'll notice that the Indent button is
| | 01:09 | still available to us.
| | 01:10 | So we can increase or decrease
indents, just like we did with bulleted
| | 01:14 | and numbered Lists.
| | 01:15 | If we click Increase Indent, you'll
notice it's increased by the default value,
| | 01:19 | which can be adjusted by the way,
and it looks to be about a half inch.
| | 01:23 | Click it again, and it's indented again.
| | 01:26 | Notice the font size is shrinking to
accommodate the extra indents and the lack
| | 01:31 | of width that we're creating because of it.
| | 01:34 | Now, we can also go to the opposite
button to decrease the indent, and with each
| | 01:38 | click, we remove those indents.
| | 01:41 | Sometimes you just want to indent the
first line, and in that case you wouldn't
| | 01:44 | use either of these buttons.
| | 01:46 | You'd just click before the very first word,
in this case, the Year, in our paragraph, and
| | 01:50 | then press your Tab key, and that
indents the first line only, known as
| | 01:54 | a first-line indent.
| | 01:55 | Well, let's hit the Backspace key or
Delete key on your keyboard to take that
| | 02:00 | out, and we're going to go up
to our Line Spacing options now.
| | 02:04 | This looks a little bit crowded, and we
can increase the space between the lines
| | 02:08 | without actually using our Return key.
| | 02:10 | We want to keep it as a paragraph, and
as soon as you hit Return at the end of
| | 02:13 | a line, you're starting a new paragraph.
| | 02:15 | So, to be able to apply some of these
Paragraph options, we need to keep it as a
| | 02:19 | paragraph, but we'll adjust the spacing.
| | 02:21 | If you have multiple paragraphs,
you can click and drag over them.
| | 02:24 | Let's just select the entire first
paragraph here by clicking and dragging, and
| | 02:28 | go to the Line Spacing button that
appears right next to the Indent buttons.
| | 02:33 | So, when we click this, you're going to
see a list of preset options to choose
| | 02:37 | from, including the one
that's currently selected;
| | 02:39 | that's the check mark 1.0, or
what we would call single spacing.
| | 02:44 | If you want to try out double spacing, that
would be - you guessed it - 2.0. Let's try it.
| | 02:50 | Now with double-spaced,
| | 02:51 | it's still a single paragraph.
| | 02:52 | We got those extra spaces in between
each line, but they were put there by our
| | 02:57 | Line Spacing option.
| | 02:59 | So that's a little bit too much;
| | 03:00 | we can go back to the same button now
and try maybe 1.5. And when we do that,
| | 03:06 | you can see that's a little bit
easier to read, and it's not overly spaced.
| | 03:10 | There are some additional
options to check out too, if you want.
| | 03:13 | Click the Line Spacing button and then
click Line Spacing Options down below.
| | 03:17 | This is a shortcut to the Format Text
window that we would access from the Format menu.
| | 03:22 | In this case, you can see Paragraph is
selected and all of our paragraph formatting
| | 03:26 | options, including alignment, are there.
| | 03:28 | There's the indentation options, and
you've also got those spacing options.
| | 03:33 | So, the spacing that you see here for Before
and After mean before or after a paragraph.
| | 03:38 | If you've ever typed in a paragraph and
then you press the Return key, you know
| | 03:42 | it goes down to the next line
and starts a new paragraph.
| | 03:45 | If you want extra space between those
paragraphs, you shouldn't be hitting the
| | 03:49 | Return key another time;
| | 03:51 | just adjust the Spacing here, so
the extra space is inserted for you.
| | 03:55 | That way you're not creating a new
blank paragraph and then pressing Return to
| | 03:58 | start another paragraph.
| | 03:59 | Here is our Line spacing;
| | 04:01 | you could see it is set to 1.5 lines.
| | 04:03 | When we click this, there are some
other options here, but not as many as we
| | 04:06 | saw from the Ribbon.
| | 04:08 | We'll just click OK, and it
takes us back to our slide.
| | 04:12 | We'll click off the slide to deselect
it, and that looks much easier to read.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding and replacing content| 00:00 | If you've ever used the Find and
Replace functionality often found in word
| | 00:04 | processing applications like
Microsoft Word, you'll be happy to know that
| | 00:08 | PowerPoint has that same functionality;
| | 00:11 | they are shared throughout the Office suite.
| | 00:13 | So if you need to find content quickly,
it's easier to use PowerPoint than to
| | 00:18 | try and do it yourself - probably a lot
faster - and if you need to find something
| | 00:22 | and replace it with something
else, you can save even more time.
| | 00:25 | So let's start with our TwoTrees
presentation here, trying to find some content.
| | 00:31 | We could go to the Edit menu, but
you'll also notice, up on the toolbar in the
| | 00:34 | very far right-hand corner,
| | 00:36 | you'll see Search in Presentation.
| | 00:37 | There is a field there for searching.
| | 00:39 | You just click inside, and
type what we are looking for.
| | 00:43 | Let's type in the work 'garlic,' for example.
| | 00:44 | Now when you press your Return key on
the keyboard, you are going to go to the
| | 00:50 | first occurrence of the word
'garlic' in this presentation.
| | 00:54 | You'll notice it's in our Products
slide. Not only does it take you to that
| | 00:57 | slide, but it also highlights the word
for you, so you see it there, and if you
| | 01:01 | needed to make changes to it, you could.
| | 01:04 | So this is slide 12.
| | 01:06 | If we press Return again,
you can see what happens.
| | 01:09 | It moves us to that next slide, and in
this case it's looped around to slide
| | 01:13 | 11, and it also appears there on slide 11.
| | 01:16 | Press Return again, and
you are back to slide 12.
| | 01:19 | So it only appears on those two slides.
Each time you press Return, you are
| | 01:23 | going to flip-flop between the two slides.
| | 01:25 | What if you want to find something
and replace it with something else?
| | 01:28 | Well, you could go to the Edit menu
again. Notice also that this little field
| | 01:33 | here we typed in garlic has a
magnifying glass and a dropdown.
| | 01:37 | You can access the Replace
function from there as well.
| | 01:41 | So let's click Replace.
| | 01:42 | It opens up this little window.
Now what you search for last will appear there,
| | 01:46 | but it is selected, so
you can type right over it.
| | 01:49 | Let's say, for example, that we
typed in someone's name incorrectly.
| | 01:53 | We'll just navigate up to the slide
with our management team. And this whole
| | 01:58 | family with the last name Vitalia, really
it's incorrectly spelled, should be Votalia.
| | 02:04 | So there's so many occurrences that
this is going to be a lot faster using a
| | 02:07 | replace functionality.
| | 02:09 | So in the Find what field, we are going
to type in what we are looking for, type
| | 02:13 | in the Vitalia, and down
below the correct spelling.
| | 02:22 | And now we have some options here.
| | 02:23 | We can match case, so only occurrences
where we see the capital V in this case,
| | 02:29 | or it could be the whole word only,
and this is handy if you are looking for
| | 02:33 | shorter words that might be included in
bigger words, like the word 'the' which
| | 02:38 | might be part of the word Theme, for example.
| | 02:40 | So we don't really need that in this case,
because we are looking at a proper name.
| | 02:45 | Now we have some buttons on the right-
hand side. Find next is going to take us
| | 02:48 | to the first occurrence,
which is right at the top.
| | 02:51 | Now when we click Find next, it's
highlighted, so we can now move a little
| | 02:55 | further down and choose Replace,
which will replace it, and move to the next
| | 03:00 | one. And we can keep clicking the
Replace button until they're all fixed. Or, if
| | 03:05 | you're confident that the word - in this case,
| | 03:07 | 'Vitalia' - won't be included in some
larger word or maybe somewhere it exists this
| | 03:13 | way and doesn't need to be changed,
| | 03:15 | well, then you might want to
consider using the Replace All button.
| | 03:19 | When you click Replace All, look at that.
There were four more replacements that
| | 03:22 | were made, and you click OK.
| | 03:25 | So it did it a lot faster than we
could have. And this is throughout our
| | 03:30 | presentation, not just this slide, so we
saved a lot of time not having to locate
| | 03:35 | the incorrect spelling of Votalia, and
we saved a lot of time by not having to
| | 03:40 | edit the incorrect spelling.
| | 03:42 | So that's all fixed for us.
| | 03:43 | We can click the close button
now to return to our presentation.
| | 03:47 | And as we scroll up, for example, and
go to our story, notice that it's fixed
| | 03:51 | here on slide number 5, and we
weren't even on slide 5 when we ran the Find
| | 03:56 | and Replace function.
| | 03:58 | There is some advanced functionality as well.
| | 04:01 | This time let's go to the Edit menu,
and we'll go down to Find, and you'll
| | 04:06 | notice Find is available here.
| | 04:08 | We have also got Replace.
And there it is: Advanced Find.
| | 04:11 | We could have got that from the very top-
right corner of our screen as well, but
| | 04:15 | here you can see we can type in
what it is we are looking for.
| | 04:18 | We can match case, find whole words only,
all the stuff we saw from the Replace.
| | 04:23 | There is the Replace button.
| | 04:24 | It gives us the double option now to
find something and replace it with.
| | 04:29 | So we can go through the Edit menu or
we can go through the Find field that
| | 04:33 | appears in the top right-
hand corner on our toolbar.
| | 04:36 | However you go about selecting it,
| | 04:38 | it's going to save you a lot of time
when it comes to locating content and
| | 04:43 | replacing that contact with something else.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Working with Tables and ChartsAdding a table to a slide| 00:01 | When you need to organize content into
columns and rows, PowerPoint allows you
| | 00:05 | to insert tables to do so, and there
is a couple of different ways to do it.
| | 00:09 | We are going to take a look now using
our TwoTreesTale presentation. And we
| | 00:13 | are going to start by moving down the
Navigation pane, dragging our scrollbar
| | 00:17 | to slide number 12.
| | 00:19 | You'll notice there are two slides,
| | 00:20 | 11 and 12, talking about our products.
| | 00:22 | When we click 12, we can see it's a
continued slide, listing the last three products.
| | 00:28 | Next, we want to add a slide,
| | 00:29 | let's say, that's going to show our
product pricing. In that case, we want our
| | 00:33 | products to line up with the prices.
It could be a contact list, could be a matrix,
| | 00:38 | could be a number of different
scenarios where you want to line things up and a
| | 00:41 | table is perfect for that.
| | 00:43 | So the first thing is to insert the new slide.
| | 00:45 | We'll do that by clicking the New Slide
button, which will insert the default,
| | 00:50 | exactly what we need: a title and content.
| | 00:54 | We'll click to add title, and
we'll just type in Product Pricing.
| | 00:58 | We'll click off the slide now, and
just scroll up, so you can see our Product
| | 01:02 | Pricing slide now
appears after our product list.
| | 01:06 | So in the content area
you'll notice Click to add text.
| | 01:10 | That will allow us to add our own text, but
to get it to line up, we really need a table.
| | 01:14 | Well, there are some icons that appear
in the middle of the slide, different
| | 01:17 | types of content, and the
first icon is the table icon.
| | 01:21 | Click this, and you get to
choose the number of columns and rows.
| | 01:25 | So if you click it, you can see
the default is set to 2 and 2.
| | 01:28 | Let's just click Cancel,
because there is another option.
| | 01:31 | You can also go to the Tables tab,
where you have access to all of your table
| | 01:35 | commands in one place on this Ribbon.
| | 01:38 | The very first button is the New button.
| | 01:41 | So this is another option for inserting
a new table. Just give it a click, and
| | 01:46 | then you get to move across and down to
the desired number of columns and rows,
| | 01:51 | and say, we want 4 x 6.
| | 01:52 | We have got six products and we want four columns.
| | 01:56 | So we give it a click, and
there is our Product Pricing table.
| | 01:59 | Notice it appears
automatically in the content area.
| | 02:03 | This is the equivalent of us using the
table icon and choosing four columns and six rows.
| | 02:10 | Now by default, you are going to see
some formatting. For example, the table
| | 02:14 | goes from the far left to the far
right, and we've got four equal columns.
| | 02:18 | You'll also see some shading on the
inside, but we can change all of that.
| | 02:22 | We will talk a bit about that a little bit
later. Right now, let's just get the content in.
| | 02:26 | The very first row is what we call a
header row, and here is where we put in
| | 02:31 | titles; for example, in our Product
Pricing table we might want to put in the
| | 02:35 | various flavors and sizes here.
| | 02:38 | So we are going to type in headings for
Flavor. Hit your Tab key on the keyboard
| | 02:44 | to move to the next cell, and
now we'll do our different sizes.
| | 02:49 | So let's say we've got a 10-
ounce bottle, and then we'll hit Tab.
| | 02:52 | We have also got a 16-ounce
bottle and a 20-ounce bottle.
| | 02:58 | So here is where we list our flavors,
and here is where we list the prices for
| | 03:02 | the different sizes.
| | 03:03 | So we'll start entering
some of this content now.
| | 03:07 | When you press Return, you can see
it actually gives you extra space.
| | 03:11 | It doesn't take you down to the next
cell, if that's what you're thinking.
| | 03:14 | So hit your Delete key or Backspace key, and
just click down below to move into that cell.
| | 03:19 | You can also use your arrow keys
to move up, down, left, and right.
| | 03:23 | Under Mandarin, we'll
continue adding our flavors.
| | 03:25 | When we get to Jalapeno, we realize
we are short a row here, and now we need
| | 03:30 | an extra row for our
last flavor, which is garlic.
| | 03:33 | There is some different
options for that as well.
| | 03:36 | One, you can hit your Tab key.
| | 03:38 | You know that takes you to the next
cell. And when you reach the last cell,
| | 03:41 | pressing Tab again will add a new row.
| | 03:45 | You could also right-click anywhere in
your table, and you can see you have an
| | 03:48 | Insert option here from the menu to
Insert Columns and Rows. And you can choose
| | 03:52 | where it's going to go, Above
or Below your flashing cursor.
| | 03:55 | But we've already inserted, so all we
need to do now is click in the cell under
| | 03:58 | Jalapeno and type in 'Garlic,' and that
will just fill in the various prices for
| | 04:06 | the different sized bottles.
| | 04:09 | And once we get to the end, we filled
in our table and notice how everything
| | 04:12 | is perfectly lined up.
| | 04:13 | We've got our columns;
| | 04:15 | we've without our rows and everything
is easy to read, thanks to the formatting
| | 04:20 | we also see in the background, but
because everything is lined up using the
| | 04:23 | table, we are well organized.
| | 04:25 | So whenever you need to create that
organization of content, think about contact
| | 04:30 | lists and matrices and so on, where you
want to make it easy for the viewer to
| | 04:36 | understand what they're seeing.
| | 04:38 | A table is an excellent option.
| | 04:39 | There is a couple of different ways to
insert those tables, as you have learned,
| | 04:43 | and there are many ways to format the table.
| | 04:45 | That's coming up next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing and formatting tables| 00:00 | When you insert a table on to a slide
in PowerPoint, certain formatting is
| | 00:05 | automatically applied for you.
| | 00:07 | That formatting should go with the theme
that's selected for the presentation, or
| | 00:10 | at least the slide you're working on.
But that formatting can be changed,
| | 00:14 | so we are going to talk about
manipulating your tables once they're inserted.
| | 00:17 | We are getting continued to work
with our TwoTreesTale presentation.
| | 00:21 | The first step is to click anywhere
inside your table. As soon as that
| | 00:24 | happens, you'll notice a border around
the outside of the table, indicating
| | 00:28 | it's been selected.
| | 00:29 | On the Ribbon, you'll notice a
Table Layout tab that appears, so you'll
| | 00:33 | notice with the Tables tab selected,
we have a number of table formatting
| | 00:37 | options available to us.
| | 00:39 | If you go to Table Layout, you'll see a
number of options for manipulating your
| | 00:43 | table for rows, columns, alignment, and so on.
| | 00:47 | So let's go back to the Tables tab
here and start by choosing a different
| | 00:51 | preset table style.
| | 00:53 | The Table Styles group here has a
dropdown button in the center, when you move in
| | 00:56 | there. Just give that a click, and
you'll see there are different categories -
| | 01:00 | at the top, themes that best match the
theme that's been used in your presentation.
| | 01:05 | As you scroll down, there are some
light formatting options, then we've got
| | 01:11 | medium and dark down at the bottom.
| | 01:14 | And all you have to do to change your
formatting to one of these presets is to select it.
| | 01:18 | Let's go to the top row here in Best Match
for Theme, and choose Themed Style 1 - Accent 4.
| | 01:23 | You'll see the alternating row
formatting here, which makes it easy to line
| | 01:28 | things up, and a darker
formatting across the top.
| | 01:32 | But we can change formatting
for individual cells as well.
| | 01:35 | For example, if we want to make this
top row darker, just click and drag in
| | 01:39 | the first cell, all the way across to the last
cell in the row; now the entire row is selected.
| | 01:45 | We can change things like the fill
by clicking the Fill dropdown button.
| | 01:49 | You have access to the theme colors.
| | 01:51 | You'll see what's currently selected.
| | 01:52 | You could choose something darker
perhaps. And if you wanted to, you could go
| | 01:57 | back to that dropdown Standard Colors,
More Colors from the color wheel, or
| | 02:02 | go to Fill Effects;
| | 02:04 | these are the same fill effects that
would apply to working with any object.
| | 02:07 | So we can see a solid color,
| | 02:09 | if you want to change the color from
here, add a transparency perhaps, just by
| | 02:14 | clicking and dragging. And then we
also have those other options, like
| | 02:17 | Gradient, for example.
| | 02:18 | Let's choose a linear gradient.
| | 02:22 | We'll leave the Angle at 0.
| | 02:24 | You can see the color is being used.
| | 02:27 | Let's change that right marker by
clicking it from white to a light green.
| | 02:33 | And it's a little bit more subtle
that way, and you can see it in the
| | 02:35 | background being applied.
| | 02:37 | You can take the Transparency off too.
| | 02:40 | That looks pretty good.
| | 02:41 | You could also use Pictures or Textures, and
if you wanted to choose from a texture,
| | 02:46 | you simply click the Choose
Texture button to find the one you want.
| | 02:50 | Patterns are also available
for working with selected cells.
| | 02:53 | We'll just click OK with what we've done,
and that is to use that gradient fill
| | 02:57 | across the very top.
| | 02:58 | You really see it by clicking off the slide
and deselecting the table. That looks pretty good.
| | 03:03 | We can also apply certain effects to
the entire table. Just click anywhere
| | 03:07 | inside the table again, and this time
we'll go to the Effects button, and you'll
| | 03:12 | see some options for some beveled
formatting, shadows, and reflections.
| | 03:18 | Let's go to Shadow here
and add a nice inner shadow.
| | 03:22 | Some of these give a 3D effect, so
we'll go to this one here at the very top.
| | 03:27 | Inside Top Right is what it's called, when
you hover over it. Just give it a click
| | 03:31 | and then deselect by clicking off the slide.
| | 03:33 | You can see that 3D effect
around the top and right sides.
| | 03:35 | So that formatting was easily applied.
| | 03:39 | The other thing you can do, of
course, by clicking inside the table is
| | 03:42 | manipulate the table itself by going to
the Table Layout, and here is where you
| | 03:47 | can go to add additional rows or columns.
| | 03:50 | You can merge rows or columns together,
distribute them, change alignment.
| | 03:55 | Let's see what center looks
like with everything centered.
| | 03:58 | That looks pretty good, and that's
applied to the entire table, because we
| | 04:01 | didn't select anything ahead of time.
| | 04:03 | Well, let's go now to our first
column here. We'll click and drag down, and
| | 04:08 | we'll choose left-aligned here for
those, and that looks pretty good.
| | 04:12 | I'll just deselect now to
see the end result clearly.
| | 04:17 | That's all there is to re-formatting
your table and modifying the layout of the
| | 04:20 | table - easily done after the
defaults have been applied.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Pasting a table from Excel| 00:01 | On occasion, you may find that when
you want to add content to a table on a
| | 00:05 | slide in a presentation, that content
already exists somewhere else, such as a
| | 00:09 | spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel, for example.
| | 00:13 | Well, in those cases, you can actually
go into Excel and copy that info over
| | 00:17 | to your slide in PowerPoint, and there are
number of different formats to choose from.
| | 00:21 | So let's check it out, using
our TwoTreesTale presentation.
| | 00:25 | You should be on slide 13, because
we are going to insert a new slide to
| | 00:28 | display our sales results.
| | 00:30 | To do that, we'll go up to the New Slide
dropdown button, and all we really need is a title.
| | 00:36 | We'll take the Title, and then down
below we'll have an empty space for the
| | 00:40 | content we are about to copy.
| | 00:41 | So we'll choose Title Only, and where
it says Click to add title, we'll just
| | 00:45 | click there, and type in 'Sales Results,'
And now we can just click on the slide,
| | 00:50 | anywhere on the slide, to deselect that textbox.
| | 00:53 | We are ready to copy the content over.
| | 00:55 | So we'll go over to Microsoft Excel.
| | 00:57 | If you have got the exercise files,
we are going to work with our Quarterly
| | 01:00 | Sales Results spreadsheet here. And the
first step is to select the content we
| | 01:06 | want to bring over to our slide; in this case,
it's all of the content we see on the sheet.
| | 01:10 | So I'll just click and drag across and down,
from cell A1 to F5. We have now got our range.
| | 01:19 | It's highlighted.
We just need to copy it.
| | 01:21 | So we'll go up to the Edit menu and
select Copy, or Command+C on your keyboard.
| | 01:27 | Now it's time to go back to
PowerPoint, and we are at our slide.
| | 01:31 | We are ready to paste.
| | 01:33 | When we go up to the Edit menu, you
may already know the keyboard shortcut is
| | 01:37 | Command+V. That's going to paste our
content in the default format, which is
| | 01:42 | a Microsoft Excel Object, meaning you'll be
able to edit that content in Microsoft Excel.
| | 01:47 | If you want to see a list of the
other formats, select Paste Special.
| | 01:52 | So there is the default right at the
top, Microsoft Excel Worksheet Object,
| | 01:56 | meaning you'll be able to double-
click the object and use Excel to make
| | 01:59 | changes to the content.
| | 02:02 | Sometimes though, you don't want to
be able to change to the content;
| | 02:04 | maybe it's better to paste it as a picture.
| | 02:07 | So an image has taken of that content,
and then the end result is you are
| | 02:12 | working with the picture on your
slide, as opposed to the actual data.
| | 02:16 | The same thing goes for a
Portable Document Format, or PDF.
| | 02:19 | You could also choose just to
bring it in as text, Rich Text Format,
| | 02:24 | or Unformatted Text.
| | 02:26 | So if you choose Formatted Text, any
formatting applied in Excel will also be
| | 02:30 | applied to it here in PowerPoint;
| | 02:32 | Unformatted Text, you'll get just
plain old text, and you can do the
| | 02:35 | formatting yourself.
| | 02:37 | So let's try the default, which is Microsoft
Excel Worksheet Object, and click OK. So there it is.
| | 02:43 | It kind of looks like a table in
PowerPoint, but really it's an object.
| | 02:47 | It's an Excel object.
| | 02:49 | We can go to the corners and stretch it out
if we want to make it a little bit bigger.
| | 02:53 | We can manipulate it that way.
| | 02:55 | But if you click inside, you'll notice
you don't actually click in the cells,
| | 02:58 | and you can't make changes
to the borders, and so on.
| | 03:01 | If you want it wider or more narrow
columns, you can't do any of that.
| | 03:05 | If you want to make changes to this
content, you have to double-click, and
| | 03:09 | that's going to flip you back to Microsoft
Excel, where you have access to the content.
| | 03:14 | Any changes you make here will be
shown on your slide in PowerPoint.
| | 03:18 | Let's flip back over to PowerPoint
without making any changes, and take a look
| | 03:23 | at the end result here.
| | 03:24 | Maybe we should just drag that down
towards the center of our slide and deselect
| | 03:30 | to see the end result. It looks pretty good.
| | 03:31 | So you have got all of the content from
Excel into our PowerPoint presentation,
| | 03:36 | and the format we use allows us to
go into Excel and make changes to that
| | 03:40 | content if we need to.
| | 03:41 | Let's select it one more time.
| | 03:43 | You'll notice what happens up here next
to the Home tab: a Format tab appears.
| | 03:47 | We can click that, if we want
to spice it up a little bit now.
| | 03:50 | Notice, for example, we have Shape
Styles. Now these are all dimmed out, so we
| | 03:54 | can't make changes to the style,
because it's not really a shape, but we can
| | 03:58 | make changes to the fill and Line style.
| | 04:01 | Let's go to the Line dropdown, and if
we want to choose a nice dark green, for
| | 04:05 | example, and then go back to the Line
dropdown and go down to Weights, and make
| | 04:10 | a little bit thicker, like 41/2 points,
| | 04:13 | now deselect to see the end result:
| | 04:15 | you've got that nice border around the outside.
| | 04:17 | So that's one of the formatting
changes we can make to this object.
| | 04:20 | Click it again to select it, and
click Format if you have to, to see
| | 04:25 | the formatting options.
| | 04:27 | There is also Effects that appear to
be available, until we click the button.
| | 04:31 | Notice that these are effects that
might be applied to shapes, for example, or
| | 04:35 | pictures. They are not available here
when working with an Excel object.
| | 04:39 | So that's one of the drawbacks to
choosing the Excel Object Format.
| | 04:42 | If we were to choose Picture, you'd be
able to make changes to the shape styles,
| | 04:46 | the effects and so on. The same thing goes
for fills and lines, if they are using
| | 04:51 | text effects in there.
| | 04:52 | So we'll just deselect by clicking
anywhere off to the edge of the slide, and
| | 04:57 | there is our end result.
| | 04:59 | So keep in mind, if you don't want to
have to create a table from scratch and
| | 05:03 | retype all of this data into that table,
go into Excel, if it's already there,
| | 05:08 | copy it, paste it; you'll
save yourself a lot of time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Inserting a chart| 00:00 | Sometimes data is easier to
understand, to compare data or spot trends, for
| | 00:07 | example, when that data is in a
graphical form, also known as a chart.
| | 00:11 | And here in PowerPoint 2011, you have
the same charting engine available to
| | 00:15 | you in Microsoft Excel. It's shared.
| | 00:18 | So you have the full power to
create some very impressive charts.
| | 00:21 | We are going to do that right now with
our TwoTreesTale presentation, and we are
| | 00:25 | going to do it between slides 13 and 14.
| | 00:28 | So you can click slide 13 or click
between 13 and 14; whatever you prefer.
| | 00:32 | Click New Slide and the new default
slide format, which is Title, and content
| | 00:37 | is inserted for you.
| | 00:38 | Let's start with the title.
| | 00:39 | We'll just click up there, and let's
say we want to compare a few flavors, the
| | 00:43 | sales of those flavors, who's buying what.
| | 00:45 | So we'll call this Favorite Flavors.
| | 00:48 | And we are going to highlight the top three.
| | 00:52 | All right, so down below now where it
says Click to add text, we'll also have
| | 00:55 | those content icons, and one of
them is the Insert Chart icon.
| | 00:59 | All this is going to do, when we click it,
is move us to the Charts tab on the Ribbon.
| | 01:05 | So we could just click the Charts tab,
or we could have gone up to Insert and
| | 01:09 | selected Chart from here; same thing happens.
| | 01:12 | We now see the different chart options
on the Ribbon, and there are different
| | 01:16 | chart types to choose from:
| | 01:17 | Scatter, Area, Bar, and Column,
we've also got Line and Pie.
| | 01:21 | Well, if we are going to compare three
different flavors, probably a pie chart is best.
| | 01:25 | So we'll click the pie chart.
Notice all of these have little arrows,
| | 01:28 | representing these pulldowns, and now if
you wanted to, you could select a format.
| | 01:33 | There are 2-D formats to choose from:
your Standard, Exploded, and so on.
| | 01:37 | We've also got a couple of 3-D options.
| | 01:39 | I like the 3-D Pie, so let's go with
that one, 3-D Pie unexploded, and it
| | 01:44 | actually takes us into Excel.
| | 01:46 | Remember what I said:
| | 01:47 | we are sharing the charting engine
from Excel here, so this is where we
| | 01:51 | manipulate the data. And we have some
sample data available to us here as well.
| | 01:56 | What just happened was a pie chart was
created on the slide using the sample
| | 02:00 | data, and we are about to change it.
| | 02:02 | If you want to take a peek, just move
back to PowerPoint for a second, and
| | 02:06 | you'll notice there it is.
| | 02:08 | It's called Sales. 1st, 2nd, 3rd,
and 4th Quarter, and there is the
| | 02:11 | default formatting.
| | 02:13 | We'll go back to Excel to change that data.
| | 02:16 | Let's say we are only
going to compare three flavors.
| | 02:18 | We'll start where it says, 1st Quarter
by clicking there, and type in one of
| | 02:21 | those flavors. How about basil?
| | 02:23 | Press Return, and we'll type in
another one, maybe mandarin, and maybe the
| | 02:28 | other third most popular one is garlic,
which means, of course when we press
| | 02:34 | Return, we don't need the 4th Quarter
sample data, so we'll just click on the
| | 02:38 | row header here, 5.
| | 02:40 | That selects the entire row. And to
delete this actually Ctrl+Click or
| | 02:44 | Right-Click and select Delete. Gone.
| | 02:48 | Now instead of Sales, let's type in
Favorites, and the actual percentages, now we
| | 02:55 | can start entering those.
Let's type in 45 for Basil.
| | 03:00 | We'll type in 15 for Mandarin
and 40 for Garlic. There we go.
| | 03:06 | As we are entering that data, it's
updating the chart in PowerPoint. And in fact
| | 03:11 | we can close this spreadsheet
now by clicking the Close button.
| | 03:14 | We are not prompted to save it.
| | 03:16 | That's because it's actually
saved here in our chart in PowerPoint.
| | 03:19 | So there is the new legend,
with our three favorites.
| | 03:22 | You can see the different pie pieces,
representing the percentages, and the other
| | 03:27 | thing that happens now,
| | 03:29 | some more options are
available to us on the Ribbon.
| | 03:31 | We have some formatting options; for
example, if we want to choose a different
| | 03:35 | layout, wouldn't it be nice if we could
see those percentages as labels right on
| | 03:39 | the different pieces of pie?
| | 03:40 | Well, when you move here to this
section by clicking and click the dropdown for
| | 03:46 | Chart Quick Layouts, you will see some
different options. You can hover over them to
| | 03:49 | see what they're called: Layout 1, 2, 3, and 4.
| | 03:52 | The one we like, I think, probably is this
one here with the percentages, or even the
| | 03:57 | first one, which looks to have a label
and a percentage and no legend. You can
| | 04:02 | see that from the thumbnails.
| | 04:04 | Let's try that first one.
| | 04:06 | So sure enough, there is no legend;
instead, we see the labels, or flavors, right on
| | 04:09 | the pieces of pie and the percentages.
| | 04:11 | If you want to try the other one with
the legend and just the percentages, give
| | 04:15 | it a click, and that looks a little different.
| | 04:18 | So whatever you prefer, go ahead and select it.
| | 04:21 | Other formatting you can do from the
Ribbon involve the chart style. And again,
| | 04:25 | we can move to the bottom-center to
click the dropdown, and see a whole bunch of
| | 04:29 | different preset options
that we can choose from.
| | 04:32 | For example, let's go for this one here
in the second row, second column, which
| | 04:37 | gives us some different colors, makes
it easier to spot, and the separators in
| | 04:42 | between those colors are a
little more highlighted as well.
| | 04:46 | So that's kind of cool looking.
| | 04:47 | That's just some of the formatting
you can do. If you need to edit the data -
| | 04:51 | maybe we have got this mixed up a
little bit - notice the Edit button represents
| | 04:55 | an Excel spreadsheet.
| | 04:56 | So we open the data in Excel by clicking it.
| | 04:59 | We are back to the spreadsheet.
And maybe it was 46 and 39 that we really
| | 05:04 | wanted, so 46 and 39 for Garlic. There we go.
| | 05:09 | We close this up - no need to save it -
and there is those changes updated
| | 05:14 | automatically for us.
| | 05:16 | Just click off the slide to see
the end result with our selected
| | 05:20 | formatting, very nice.
| | 05:22 | So this works with all
different kinds of charts.
| | 05:24 | Remember, when you've got lots of data
sitting on a slide, sometimes it can lull
| | 05:28 | your audience to sleep.
| | 05:30 | It's much easier to spot the
comparisons, or the trends, and so on, if it's in
| | 05:34 | a graphical format.
| | 05:35 | So remember, you can use the same
charting capabilities here in PowerPoint that
| | 05:39 | you have in Microsoft Excel.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Pasting a chart from Excel| 00:01 | If you've been following along with me
in this chapter, you know that Microsoft
| | 00:04 | PowerPoint and Microsoft Excel, they
share the same charting engine, meaning if
| | 00:09 | we're to create a chart here in
PowerPoint we'd use Excel to edit the data.
| | 00:13 | Well, that also means if we already
have a chart that's been created in Excel
| | 00:18 | we can borrow it and paste it here onto
a slide in PowerPoint, and then be able
| | 00:22 | to use Excel to edit the data if
we choose the appropriate format.
| | 00:26 | We're going to play around with this
now using our Two Trees Tale presentation
| | 00:30 | here, and we're going to
start by moving to slide 15.
| | 00:33 | There's our Sales Results in data format.
| | 00:36 | We could maybe get a better idea of our
sales if we could see it in a graphical
| | 00:40 | format to compare the different
quarters and the different types of sales.
| | 00:44 | So, let's create a new slide for that.
| | 00:46 | We'll click the New Slide dropdown,
instead of clicking New Slide. We don't need
| | 00:50 | the content; all we need is the title
area, so we'll click Title Only, and click
| | 00:55 | where it says "Click to add title" and
type in, instead of Sales Comparison or
| | 00:59 | Results, we'll type in Chart here.
| | 01:01 | All right, now we can click off the
slide, and this is where it's going to go.
| | 01:06 | Remember it already exists, so we
don't need that content placeholder.
| | 01:09 | All we need to do is go to Excel, and
if you've got the exercise files, you'll
| | 01:14 | notice we've got our Quarterly Sales
Results spreadsheet here, which has two
| | 01:19 | tabs at the bottom: Sales and Sales Chart.
| | 01:22 | When you move over to Sales Chart,
you're going to see it's already selected.
| | 01:25 | We've got that border around the
outside, so all we need to do is copy it.
| | 01:29 | You can click the Copy button or choose
Edit and Copy or Command+C, whatever you
| | 01:34 | prefer, and switch back now to PowerPoint.
| | 01:37 | Now, here's where it's going to go.
| | 01:39 | If we click the Paste button, it's
automatically going to be pasted in the
| | 01:42 | default format, which is a drawing
object, a Microsoft Office Drawing Object,
| | 01:48 | which means we'll have the
drawing tools to modify it.
| | 01:51 | If you want to be able to edit the data
though with Excel, you want to paste it
| | 01:54 | as an Excel object. Or maybe you
don't want to be able to edit it.
| | 01:58 | You want it just to be a
picture, a static image of your chart.
| | 02:01 | These are some of the options you'll
see if you choose to go to Edit and select
| | 02:05 | Paste Special, instead of just pasting.
| | 02:08 | So there's the default, Microsoft Office
Drawing Object, so you'll have all of
| | 02:11 | the drawing tools at your
disposal if you select this format.
| | 02:15 | If you choose Microsoft Excel Chart
Object though, you'll be able to use Excel
| | 02:19 | to make changes to the data itself.
| | 02:22 | So you change the data, and the
chart will change automatically. And then
| | 02:26 | you've got a picture format, which is static
image, as is a PDF, or Portable Document Format.
| | 02:31 | So if you don't want people being able
to edit the content itself in the data,
| | 02:36 | choose one of these two formats.
| | 02:38 | Let's go with Microsoft Excel Chart
Object and click OK. So there it is.
| | 02:44 | It appears just as it appeared in Excel.
| | 02:47 | We can go to the corners to click and
drag to resize this down. We can go to the
| | 02:52 | center and click and drag it into
position and then maybe go to borders to
| | 02:57 | stretch it out, so it's a little bit
easier to read. The double arrows allows to
| | 03:02 | stretch the borders.
| | 03:03 | There, that looks pretty good, and when
we deselect by clicking off the slide, you
| | 03:06 | see the end result nice and clearly.
| | 03:09 | Click again to select, and you'll notice
the Format tab becomes available on the
| | 03:14 | Ribbon, and you have some of the
formatting options for working with shapes and
| | 03:18 | objects, such as the line.
| | 03:20 | If we want to the change the line
style to a dark green, you can click that
| | 03:23 | button, select dark green, go back to the
Line dropdown and choose a thicker line
| | 03:30 | or heavier weight, 4 1/2 points maybe.
| | 03:33 | Now, click off the slide, and you can
see that it looks a little bit nicer.
| | 03:37 | Now let's go back and click one more
time on our chart and press Delete on the
| | 03:41 | keyboard; that removes it.
| | 03:42 | Now remember, we copied it from Excel,
so it's still sitting in the clipboard
| | 03:46 | waiting to be pasted.
| | 03:47 | This time we'll go up to Edit and
choose Paste Special and try a different format
| | 03:52 | that we can't edit, like a picture.
| | 03:53 | When you click OK, it's now pasted as a
picture as opposed to an Excel object.
| | 04:00 | So when you click, you see
different types of handles.
| | 04:02 | We can still resize it by going to the
corners, going to the center to move it around.
| | 04:07 | We can stretch it out, size it, and
when we get the exact fit that we want, we
| | 04:14 | can deselect. Or you'll notice while
it's still selected, the Format Picture tab
| | 04:18 | appears, and we can click there to do
things like corrections and re-coloring,
| | 04:23 | removing backgrounds, cropping.
| | 04:25 | We also have all these picture styles,
and we can click the dropdown to choose
| | 04:28 | something cool, maybe something
that's got Perspective, for example.
| | 04:32 | That's a cool look.
| | 04:33 | So you can move it around a little bit.
| | 04:35 | It keeps that perspective.
| | 04:37 | We also have some effects to choose
from that are similar: shadow, reflections,
| | 04:42 | glows, bevels, even 3-D rotations.
| | 04:45 | I kind of like this.
| | 04:46 | Let's go with the 3-D rotation, and
we'll go to one of the perspectives that are
| | 04:50 | a little more subtle than some of the other ones.
| | 04:52 | Let's go to this one right here: bottom row.
| | 04:56 | That's kind of cool. See how it almost
comes off the slide towards us, and we'll
| | 05:01 | deselect to really get a good view of
that. Very interesting. Very different way
| | 05:05 | of displaying our data.
| | 05:07 | So because we share the same charting
engine here in PowerPoint as we do with
| | 05:12 | Excel, we have full access to all of
the charting capabilities, including the
| | 05:17 | ability to take a chart from an Excel
spreadsheet and copy it onto a slide
| | 05:21 | here in PowerPoint.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Working with Pictures and MultimediaInserting pictures and clip art| 00:00 | If it's true that a picture is worth a
thousand words, you can save yourself a
| | 00:03 | lot of typing by inserting a
picture into your presentation.
| | 00:07 | That's what we're going to look at
right now using our Album presentation.
| | 00:11 | And you can see, as we go through
the different slides over in the
| | 00:14 | thumbnails, when we get to slide 4,
we do have an image of a person here,
| | 00:19 | Maria who's the EVP of Sales.
| | 00:21 | If we go back to slide 3, we've got a
slide here for our President and CEO, but
| | 00:26 | we don't have a picture.
| | 00:27 | There are a number of different ways to
insert a picture onto a slide here in PowerPoint.
| | 00:32 | One option is to make sure the Home
tab is selected on the Ribbon and click
| | 00:37 | the Picture button.
| | 00:38 | This shows us a little menu with four
options: The Photo Browser, which will
| | 00:42 | open up our browser and allow us
to drag photos into our slide.
| | 00:46 | We could go browsing through folders
by choosing Picture from File, so if you
| | 00:50 | know exactly where your
picture is that's a good option.
| | 00:53 | We also another couple of options, when
using ClipArt, now, these would be more
| | 00:57 | generic images that are
not personal, for example.
| | 01:00 | We can use the ClipArt Browser.
| | 01:02 | If we click that, you'll notice the
Media Browser opens up with ClipArt
| | 01:06 | selected, and here's where you can
go through the various ClipArt images,
| | 01:10 | choosing the different categories if
you wanted to, until you find what it is
| | 01:13 | you're looking for.
| | 01:14 | We'll just close this up and go back to
Picture, and take a look at the ClipArt gallery.
| | 01:21 | It's a different way to
look at your clipart images.
| | 01:24 | Here's your categories down the left,
and now you can select the category,
| | 01:28 | find what you're looking for and just drag it
on to your slide, or click the Insert button.
| | 01:32 | We'll just click Close though, because
what we're looking for is stored in the
| | 01:35 | exercise file, so we'll go back to the
Picture button, and this time we'll
| | 01:39 | choose Picture from File.
| | 01:40 | Now you can navigate to your headshot
image here for Jimmy, and that's what we
| | 01:46 | want so I'm going to select it and
click Insert. See the little preview?
| | 01:50 | That's him. And now we've
got our image on our slide.
| | 01:54 | So, we'll just position it by
clicking and dragging from the center.
| | 01:58 | We'll size it up so it's a little bit bigger.
| | 02:00 | That looks pretty good.
| | 02:02 | Now if we to go over to slide 4,
you'll notice that this image here for
| | 02:07 | Maria looks different than the image
we just brought in for Jim, as far as
| | 02:10 | the formatting goes.
| | 02:12 | So, there're a number of things we can
do with this picture once we get it onto
| | 02:15 | our slide, that's what
we're going to look at next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Replacing and adjusting pictures| 00:00 | Sometimes when you bring images or
pictures into a presentation in PowerPoint,
| | 00:05 | the picture itself isn't perfect.
| | 00:07 | It might need some adjusting or formatting.
| | 00:10 | Well, the good news is you don't need
separate photo editing software to handle
| | 00:13 | many of the adjustments.
| | 00:14 | They are built right into PowerPoint.
| | 00:16 | We're going to take a look
at some of them right now.
| | 00:18 | On slide 3, we just inserted the image
of who we thought was Jim Coyller - maybe
| | 00:23 | it's the wrong image.
| | 00:24 | The first thing we're going to talk
about is removing an image and replacing it
| | 00:28 | with something else.
| | 00:29 | Now we could select the image and
delete it and then bring in the right image,
| | 00:33 | but there is a better option.
| | 00:35 | First, so let's just adjust this.
| | 00:36 | We'll size it up a little bit and
position it little more to the left.
| | 00:40 | This is important. When you replace an
image, it's going to stay in the same
| | 00:44 | place, and it's going to be the same size.
| | 00:46 | That's why I like it.
| | 00:47 | We'll Ctrl+click or right-click the
image, and from the pop-up menu, you'll notice
| | 00:52 | one for Change Picture, so we'll select that.
| | 00:55 | We'll navigate, and there's
the correct picture headshot of
| | 00:57 | JimC (Headshot_JimC).
| | 00:59 | You can see a preview of it.
| | 01:00 | When we click Insert, it replaces the image.
| | 01:03 | It's the same location, the same size;
| | 01:05 | it's just the different image. I like that!
| | 01:07 | Now with its still selected, you'll
also notice the Format Picture tab just
| | 01:12 | appeared on the Ribbon. You can click it.
| | 01:14 | And the first group is titled Adjust,
| | 01:16 | a whole bunch of adjustment options
here for adjusting the image itself.
| | 01:19 | Like I said, we don't have to take the
image into a separate piece of software
| | 01:23 | to make those changes. We can do a lot of it
right from here, like cropping, for example,
| | 01:27 | if you wanted to crop it, crop it to fit,
crop out parts of it using the Cropping tool;
| | 01:33 | maybe we want to remove some of the
stuff on the left-hand side and then just
| | 01:38 | click off the image to
see the end result. Good!
| | 01:41 | We'll go back to select it, so we can
go back to our Formatting options here.
| | 01:45 | Let's go to Corrections, for example.
| | 01:46 | If you click the Corrections dropdown,
you'll see some presets for sharpening
| | 01:50 | and softening and
adjusting brightness and contrast.
| | 01:53 | So I want to make this a little bit
brighter and leave the contrast alone.
| | 01:57 | We might go to the third row of options here,
the second to last thumbnail, give it a click, and
| | 02:02 | you'll see the looks a little bit nicer.
| | 02:05 | If you want to fine-tune that though,
you can go back to Corrections, and down at
| | 02:10 | the bottom you have access
to picture correction options.
| | 02:13 | Now you can get very detailed
with adjusting your picture.
| | 02:15 | You've got all of the sliders for
adjusting transparency of the image.
| | 02:19 | There is Brightness, Contrast.
| | 02:21 | You can see our Brightness is up to
20%. Contrast we left alone, but we can
| | 02:25 | adjust it down a little bit maybe.
| | 02:27 | There's a Sharpening
and Softening option here.
| | 02:30 | So if we go to the left, you can see the softer
it gets, and we get some artifacting. Doesn't look good.
| | 02:36 | Go to the other direction,
and we're sharpening it again.
| | 02:39 | It doesn't look great. So we can use the
slider, or you can use the up and down
| | 02:43 | arrows, or simply type in a value if you prefer.
| | 02:45 | There is also a Recoloring option, so
if you want to recolor, change the
| | 02:49 | saturation or temperature, you can do that.
| | 02:52 | But let's just click OK.
| | 02:55 | Look at the Ribbon again. We've got
this Recolor button, and these are some of
| | 02:58 | the color saturation, color tones and
recoloring presets you can choose from.
| | 03:04 | Then if you needed to, go back down at
Picture Color Options from here to make
| | 03:07 | further adjustments.
| | 03:09 | So if you wanted to change the
saturation to include a little more color or a
| | 03:14 | little less, you can go left.
| | 03:15 | All the way left to zero
would be a black and white photo.
| | 03:19 | It would be removing all
of the color from the image.
| | 03:21 | You could also cool it down or warm it
up from here and choose some Recoloring
| | 03:25 | options and special
effects, like Sepia, for example.
| | 03:30 | Now the other thing that I really like
about PowerPoint - we'll just click the
| | 03:33 | image here - is we can remove the background.
| | 03:36 | Notice if we go to slide 4 here, we've
done that with Maria, so we should do
| | 03:41 | it with Jim as well.
| | 03:42 | There is a couple of options to try it
out. It depends on the background itself.
| | 03:47 | So we'll select the image
and click Format Picture.
| | 03:51 | If you go to Recolor, you'll notice down
at the bottom you can set a transparent
| | 03:54 | color, and this is ideal for working with
images with a solid background. Let's try it!
| | 03:59 | If we go to the background, it looks
fairly solid, but as we look closely,
| | 04:03 | there is a gradient.
| | 04:04 | So if we click in the gray area, you
can see only a certain shade of gray is
| | 04:09 | removed, and that didn't work.
| | 04:10 | So we're going to click Undo and
try a different option, which is the
| | 04:14 | Remove Background option. I like this!
| | 04:17 | When we click this option, you
can see now we've got a border.
| | 04:19 | Anything inside the border
is what we're trying to keep;
| | 04:22 | anything outside those colors will
be removed, including those colors if
| | 04:27 | they appear inside.
| | 04:28 | We've also got, attached to our mouse
pointer, a Minus sign for the areas
| | 04:32 | that are about to be kept and a Plus sign for
the shaded area, so we can be very specific.
| | 04:38 | Let's start by adjusting our border here.
| | 04:40 | We want to make sure we get all of
Jim's head. Got to move out to the right.
| | 04:45 | You can see the cropped area on the
right-hand side as well. There we go!
| | 04:50 | If we bring it all the way down to the bottom,
| | 04:52 | you can see we're getting all of his head,
but we're missing his shirt in this case.
| | 04:56 | So we're pretty close to what we need.
| | 04:59 | We do want to remove this background
gray area, but we want to keep the shirt.
| | 05:02 | So when we move into that shaded
area, you'll see the Plus sign appear.
| | 05:06 | Now you can click and drag to draw lines, just
draw lines down his shirt to keep those areas.
| | 05:13 | Let's try over here from the top of the
shoulder down towards the V in the neck. Perfect!
| | 05:18 | We're keeping that.
| | 05:19 | A little bit here as well.
| | 05:21 | You can click once to add just a spot.
| | 05:24 | That color is preserved.
| | 05:25 | To see the end result, click anywhere
outside your picture, and that looks just
| | 05:30 | like our other one from Maria.
| | 05:31 | All right, so now all we need
to do is apply some formatting.
| | 05:36 | If we go to slide 4, you can
see there's a shadow back here.
| | 05:39 | There is really no borders.
| | 05:40 | We want to mimic that here on
slide 3, so select the image.
| | 05:45 | When we go to Format Picture, now
we're going to focus on the Picture Styles
| | 05:49 | areas, and there are
some presets to choose from.
| | 05:52 | So if you wanted to choose a different
kind of border - that doesn't look right,
| | 05:56 | doesn't match our other
slides. We'll click Undo.
| | 05:59 | We could also adjust the border from here.
| | 06:01 | If we click the Effects, we have shadow effects.
| | 06:04 | We also has some other options
for glows and bevels and reflections.
| | 06:09 | So let's go to Shadow here, and
there's the shadow we're looking for,
| | 06:13 | under Perspective, right in the center.
Give that a click, and you can see the
| | 06:17 | shadow in the background.
| | 06:18 | We'll deselect, and there is the end result.
| | 06:22 | It looks very much like our image for Maria.
| | 06:27 | So, although you may not have the
perfect image when you insert it into your
| | 06:31 | slide in PowerPoint, you have a
number of tools for adjusting that image built
| | 06:35 | right in, as well as some
formatting options to make them stand out.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Drawings and SmartArt| 00:00 | With PowerPoint 2011, you can create
your own drawings or graphics by using some
| | 00:05 | of the drawing tools available to you.
| | 00:07 | Here we're going to take a look at some of
them, with a focus on something called SmartArt.
| | 00:12 | So, still working with our album
presentation, let's go to slide number 5 by
| | 00:17 | clicking it in the Thumbnail pane.
| | 00:19 | Here we have a blank slide with a title
for our Management Team at a GLANCE, a
| | 00:23 | perfect slide for
creating an organizational chart.
| | 00:27 | There is a couple of different ways
| | 00:29 | we can do this. Traditionally with
the Home tab selected on the Ribbon,
| | 00:33 | you probably think about going up to
the Shape button, give that a click, go
| | 00:36 | down to rectangles and
select a rectangle, for example.
| | 00:39 | Then click and drag to draw it,
| | 00:42 | double-click inside to start typing text,
maybe even change up the style a little bit.
| | 00:49 | Then go back to the Home tab and insert
a subordinate by clicking Shape again,
| | 00:56 | down to Rectangle, selecting the
rectangle and drawing another one.
| | 01:00 | Maybe this time when you double-
click, it will be the EVP for Sales.
| | 01:07 | Now you want to connect these, so you
would go back to the Home tab, back to the
| | 01:12 | Shape button, and at the top
you've got Lines and Connectors.
| | 01:15 | A standard line will allow you to draw
lines that connect, but there are some
| | 01:20 | fairly intelligent options
here, like the Elbow Connector.
| | 01:24 | These connectors, anything that says
connector, will stay connected, so there are
| | 01:28 | some options here with intelligence.
| | 01:30 | Let's go to the Elbow Connector and test it out.
| | 01:33 | When you move your mouse pointer inside a
shape, you'll see the handles turn red.
| | 01:38 | That's because you're about to connect them.
| | 01:39 | So let's go to the bottom
center, for example, for CEO.
| | 01:42 | When you get over the red connector,
click and drag diagonally down to the
| | 01:47 | EVP-Sales and let go in the
red connector at the top center.
| | 01:51 | They are now connected.
| | 01:53 | We know they are because we see the
red at each end, so you didn't miss.
| | 01:56 | So what is the intelligence?
| | 01:59 | Well, if we go into our EVP rectangle
with the four-sided arrow, click and drag
| | 02:03 | this down and over to the left,
| | 02:05 | notice it stays connected.
| | 02:07 | We drag it back up,
it stays connected.
| | 02:10 | It's redrawn for us.
| | 02:11 | So it's somewhat smart, but it's very tedious.
| | 02:14 | You have to draw all of
your boxes and enter your text.
| | 02:17 | Eventually, you'll have a nice
looking art chart, but there is a better way.
| | 02:21 | So let's press Delete to remove each
of the items we drew. Just click once to
| | 02:26 | select and press Delete until they are all gone.
| | 02:29 | This time I'm going to go to SmartArt.
| | 02:31 | SmartArt has its own tab on the Ribbon.
| | 02:33 | When you give it a click, you'll see
different types of SmartArt graphics that
| | 02:36 | can be drawn: pictures,
relationships, lists at the beginning.
| | 02:41 | When you click these you'll see a
number of different styles to choose from.
| | 02:44 | Lots of different lists, for example,
lots of different processes, lots of
| | 02:50 | different diagrams that can be used here.
| | 02:53 | If we go to Hierarchy, that's
where we find the org chart.
| | 02:56 | A number of org chart options,
including this fourth one.
| | 02:59 | I like it because you can
add text and a picture even.
| | 03:02 | We'll select it, and we'll
experiment a little bit with this.
| | 03:05 | So we can size this and move it
around by going to the border.
| | 03:10 | You'll notice now, you've got text, and
you've got icons representing the pictures.
| | 03:16 | You may also be looking at the Text pane.
| | 03:20 | The Text pane appears on the left.
Usually by default it opens up if you never
| | 03:24 | used this before, but it remembers the
state you were in the last time you used it.
| | 03:28 | So if you close it up, this what it's going to
look like the next time you use this feature.
| | 03:33 | So let's open it back up.
| | 03:36 | Now we can do our editing here
inside the graphic or in our Outline View,
| | 03:40 | depending on your preference.
| | 03:42 | Right now, you can see the cursor
flashing at the very top, and that's the
| | 03:45 | equivalent of clicking
Text over here at the top.
| | 03:48 | Notice how the whole thing is
selected now in our Text pane.
| | 03:52 | Let's just type in CEO.
| | 03:55 | Notice the size of the font.
| | 03:57 | I say that because when we click Text
for one of the subordinates, say the one
| | 04:01 | down on the left-hand side, and type EVP - so
far so goo - but we're going to add Sales.
| | 04:07 | So leave a space and type in Sales.
| | 04:10 | Notice it's too big to
fit inside the placeholder,
| | 04:13 | so it's sized down and wraps around,
but everything else is also sized down.
| | 04:17 | So it's consistent.
| | 04:18 | That's part of SmartArt.
| | 04:20 | We go over to the other subordinate
and type in EVP Marketing, a bigger word
| | 04:27 | even, and again,
everything sized down accordingly.
| | 04:31 | So we could be doing that by
clicking anywhere in our outline.
| | 04:35 | You also have buttons for adding
additional subordinates or removing them.
| | 04:39 | So let's say, for example, our EVP of Sales here,
| | 04:43 | if we click what it says Text and
click the border, you'll notice the entire
| | 04:48 | thing is selected inside
our outline in the Text pane.
| | 04:51 | Hit Delete on your keyboard.
| | 04:53 | You just removed one of the subordinate,
and all of the graphics are resized for
| | 04:58 | you and the fonts inside the text placeholders.
| | 05:01 | If we go back down to our EVP of Marketing
now and just click anywhere in the empty
| | 05:07 | Text and add one by clicking the Add button,
| | 05:10 | you can see now everything is resized again.
| | 05:13 | We've got our brand-new subordinate.
| | 05:16 | So I'll just remove that by clicking
the Remove button if we don't need it.
| | 05:22 | So you have the Text pane to help you
along with this, but you can also just
| | 05:25 | continue to work inside the diagram itself.
| | 05:28 | Let's go up to the CEO
and click the Picture icon.
| | 05:32 | This allows us to navigate to the
location of our headshot - if you got the
| | 05:37 | exercise files - and insert it.
| | 05:40 | It gets inserted inside
the circle, just like that.
| | 05:44 | Now we can also change the look
and feel of our SmartArt Graphic.
| | 05:49 | Let's just go up to the dropdown here
and take a look at some of the options.
| | 05:54 | Here're some 3D options.
It kind of looks like a button now.
| | 05:58 | But notice it affects all of the
graphics here, not just the one we're working
| | 06:01 | on. Again, it's SmartArt.
| | 06:03 | You can click the dropdown one more time.
| | 06:07 | Let's go to one that's
got a beveled look maybe.
| | 06:10 | Metallic Scene, it's called.
| | 06:12 | That's a cool effect.
| | 06:13 | There's our CEO at the top.
| | 06:15 | We've got our SmartArt Graphics that
we can add or remove subordinates as
| | 06:19 | needed, and everything will be adjusted
accordingly for us, saving us a lot of time and energy.
| | 06:24 | So I'll just click off
slide to see the end result.
| | 06:27 | Very nice!
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding video to a slide| 00:00 | If you have video footage you'd like
to include in a presentation, PowerPoint
| | 00:04 | allows you to insert movies or video clips.
| | 00:08 | That's what we were going to do right
now, using our Album4.ppx presentation.
| | 00:11 | We are on slide number six.
| | 00:13 | It's titled The Process.
| | 00:14 | And if we have video footage showing
how we can take the olive all way to the
| | 00:19 | olive oil, we can include that on the
slide by simply inserting it like we
| | 00:23 | would any other object.
| | 00:25 | There's a few different ways we can do this.
| | 00:27 | One option is to go to the toolbar.
| | 00:29 | You'll notice a button that
accesses your Media Browser. Click this.
| | 00:33 | You will see the Media Browser open up
with Movies selected, and now you can
| | 00:37 | go to your iMovie movies, your Movies
folders, and find the file that you're looking for.
| | 00:43 | Another option is to access it from the
Media button in the Insert group, here on
| | 00:48 | the Home Tab of the Ribbon.
| | 00:50 | Now in this case, you can access the
Movie Browser the same, or if you to
| | 00:54 | prefer go browsing through folders, you
can select the Movie from File option.
| | 00:59 | This is also available by
going to the Insert menu,
| | 01:02 | moving down to Movie, and
you'll see those two options:
| | 01:05 | the Movie Browser as well as Movie from File.
| | 01:08 | Now since we've got the file in our
exercise files, we will select Movie from
| | 01:12 | File, navigate to the Video Tour.
| | 01:15 | Notice that the format is .mov file, but you
can insert other formats like AVI and MPEGs.
| | 01:22 | If you have plug-ins, you can also
insert Windows Media Video, WMV files.
| | 01:28 | So we are going to use this
MOV file called Video Tour,
| | 01:31 | we'll click Insert, and just like any
other object, it appears on our slide. And
| | 01:35 | of course, there are things
we can do with this now.
| | 01:38 | First of all, notice the
Format Movie tab has appeared.
| | 01:41 | So we can apply formatting options.
| | 01:43 | The first thing we might want
to do though, is to resize this.
| | 01:47 | So let's go down to the bottom-right corner.
| | 01:49 | I will just click and drag inwards to
resize this, so it's not overlapping
| | 01:53 | our text down below.
| | 01:54 | You'll also notice that we have
controls here, to play and pause, or to
| | 02:00 | rewind and fast-forward.
| | 02:02 | You'll also see a time count here.
| | 02:04 | We can adjust the volume;
| | 02:05 | let's bring this down.
| | 02:08 | And this is not something that's to
going to appear while we play the slideshow;
| | 02:12 | we have other options for when we play
the slideshow, but it does give us handy
| | 02:16 | tools here for playing
the movie as we work on it.
| | 02:19 | So we can check it out by
clicking the Play button. Let's do that.
| | 02:22 | (Male Speaker: You can see that it's got quite a few
olives. Most of the olives are still a light green.)
| | 02:29 | We'll click Pause there, and
you can see it looks pretty good.
| | 02:32 | Now it does start out as a black
screen, at the very beginning, but we
| | 02:37 | can change that too.
| | 02:39 | With it selected, and the Format
Movie tab selected on the Ribbon,
| | 02:42 | let's go down to some of the Movie Options,
starting with how this movie is going to play.
| | 02:47 | Notice the default is On Click, so as we
were playing our slideshow, we actually
| | 02:51 | have to click this image, and
it would start playing our movie for us.
| | 02:56 | Well, how's it going to play?
| | 02:57 | There are playback options.
| | 02:58 | Let's click the dropdown.
| | 02:59 | We can have it play fullscreen, so it
overtakes our slide and just focus on
| | 03:04 | the video. Or, we can hide it while it's not
playing, so it looks like the blank slide.
| | 03:09 | We can also have it loop until it stops,
so it keeps starting over, or would
| | 03:13 | you rather just rewind back to the
beginning after it's done playing, and then
| | 03:16 | you'd have to click it again to get it going?
| | 03:19 | Let's go with a fullscreen option, and
the other start option, besides On Click,
| | 03:24 | is to have a go automatically.
| | 03:26 | So if you want it just to jump into the
movie, you can have it automatically play
| | 03:29 | when we arrive at this slide.
| | 03:31 | I think we will leave it On
Click, so we can control that.
| | 03:34 | Now the other neat thing
is called the poster frame.
| | 03:37 | As I mentioned, when we see this
object, it's a black rectangle, but we can
| | 03:42 | move across our time counter, until we arrive
at a frame that looks like it might be suitable.
| | 03:46 | So instead of looking at, for example,
a black screen, we might want to see an
| | 03:52 | image of our olives in the process.
| | 03:54 | So we can just drag across
until we see an image we like.
| | 03:58 | You can go backwards by clicking and dragging,
and that might be a good image right there.
| | 04:04 | So that's what we see on our
slide until we play the movie.
| | 04:07 | Of course, the movie will play from the
beginning, not from this point, but this
| | 04:10 | is the image, we'll see.
| | 04:12 | So let's make that our poster frame.
| | 04:14 | We use current frame.
| | 04:15 | Now you could use a separate picture
altogether that's not even in the movie if
| | 04:19 | you wanted to, or reset it back
to the beginning. There we go.
| | 04:23 | And of course, we have all
the other options for adjusting.
| | 04:26 | If you want to make this a little bit
brighter, for example, you can click the
| | 04:30 | Corrections button here, and go for
something with a little more contrast.
| | 04:34 | We can adjust the color,
cropping, and movie styles as well.
| | 04:39 | Let's click the dropdown here to look
at some of the different movie styles.
| | 04:42 | If you want a frame around
it, you could even tilt it.
| | 04:45 | I can't like the tilt here
with the shadowing behind.
| | 04:47 | That looks pretty good. Let's test it out.
| | 04:51 | Now of course, we can play the movie
any time by clicking the Play button or
| | 04:55 | previewing the movie itself, clicking
the Play button up here on the Ribbon.
| | 04:58 | But if you really want to see how it's
going to appear during your presentation,
| | 05:02 | move down to the very bottom
and click the Slideshow button.
| | 05:08 | So our slideshow is up.
| | 05:09 | We see the picture frame or poster frame,
we chose, and as you move your mouse
| | 05:14 | over the image, notice the Play button
appears, but you also have the pointing
| | 05:18 | finger, as you move over the image.
| | 05:20 | So you can click to play at anytime.
| | 05:22 | (Male Speaker: You can see that it's got quite a few
olives. Most of the olives are still a light green. But -)
| | 05:30 | When we click Pause, we pause
that spot in the movie itself.
| | 05:34 | Press Escape on your keyboard to exit the movie.
| | 05:37 | We are still in the slideshow.
| | 05:39 | Press Escape again, and you will
come right back to working on your
| | 05:42 | slide presentation.
| | 05:44 | So with PowerPoint 2011, you can add
movies in various formats, and you can
| | 05:49 | really spice them up, so
they stand out on your slides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding sound to a presentation| 00:00 | With PowerPoint 2011, you have the
ability to add audio to a presentation.
| | 00:05 | Audio could be somebody speaking, an
audio clip that appears on a slide,
| | 00:09 | it could be music that plays in the
background as the presentation plays;
| | 00:14 | it's totally up to you, and there are a
few different options for adding audio.
| | 00:17 | We are going to do that
using our Album presentation.
| | 00:20 | The last thing we did was to add video.
| | 00:22 | If you're going to be adding audio - and
let's say it is going to be music that
| | 00:26 | plays in the background;
| | 00:27 | this is as a presentation
that's going to play on its own -
| | 00:29 | well, in that case, you want to make
sure it doesn't interfere with any other
| | 00:33 | audio that might be added, including
the audio that's part of a video clip.
| | 00:37 | So we're going to start on slide six
by clicking the video clip. There it is.
| | 00:42 | You don't really have to select it,
but we're going to down to the speaker
| | 00:45 | icon and just click it.
| | 00:47 | That's just same as
dragging the button all way down.
| | 00:49 | It mutes the audio.
| | 00:51 | So it'd nice to be able to see what's
going on but listen to the music in the
| | 00:54 | background, the music we're about to add
starting at slide one. So we will go up to slide one.
| | 01:00 | Now to insert the audio, it depends where
it is, you can access your Media Browser
| | 01:05 | by clicking the Media Browser button
or by accessing it from the Ribbon.
| | 01:10 | You'll notice you've got the Audio Browser.
It allows you to go and get songs from iTunes.
| | 01:14 | If you've got the audio file stored
away somewhere, you can browse for it
| | 01:18 | through your folders, choosing Audio from File.
| | 01:21 | You can even create your own audio:
just record like if you have got a
| | 01:24 | microphone attached to your computer.
| | 01:26 | Let's go to Audio from File.
| | 01:28 | We have got one called Jazzy Groove.
Notice it's an MP3, and there are
| | 01:33 | different audio formats that can be added.
| | 01:36 | Don't worry about the format.
| | 01:37 | If we've got an audio file, you are
going to be able to add it here by clicking
| | 01:40 | the Insert button. And it
automatically gets inserted as an icon, a speaker
| | 01:45 | icon, right in the center of your slide.
| | 01:47 | Now you can make this invisible while you're
playing the slideshow, or it can stay there -
| | 01:52 | you've got the controls attached
to it - or you can move it around.
| | 01:56 | Let's move it to the bottom left-hand
corner, and let's make it a little bit smaller,
| | 01:59 | so it's not sticking out like a sore thumb.
| | 02:02 | You've also got the controls here for
playing it, to see what it sounds like,
| | 02:06 | and this Play button will turn into
a Pause button. Let's try it out.
| | 02:09 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:14 | Okay that's probably a little too loud,
so we can go to the speaker icon now and
| | 02:18 | just bring the volume down a
little bit, and we'll drag it.
| | 02:21 | We don't need to mute it.
| | 02:23 | And you can see that we have also got
the counter here, showing us how far
| | 02:27 | into the song we get.
| | 02:29 | So it looks like it's just
over two minutes and 20 seconds.
| | 02:34 | Now with this selected still, we've got
a number of options that appear with the
| | 02:37 | Format Audio tab on the Ribbon.
| | 02:39 | How this is going to play?
| | 02:41 | Well, let's say the scenario is
a presentation, kind of like a
| | 02:45 | kiosk presentation
that's going to loop around.
| | 02:48 | It's just going to play.
| | 02:48 | We want the song in the background to
play, and we don't want to have to click
| | 02:52 | anything. So in this case, we're going
to change the Start button from On Click
| | 02:57 | to Play across Slides.
| | 02:59 | That's the same as Automatically, but
it will play automatically but across all
| | 03:04 | of the slides in our presentation.
| | 03:06 | We also have some playback options here.
| | 03:08 | There is the option to hide the icon
during the slideshow itself, and we can
| | 03:14 | have it loop until it's stopped, and we
can also choose the rewind it after it's
| | 03:18 | played back to the beginning.
| | 03:20 | In this case, we want to hide it for sure.
| | 03:23 | If you go back to this dropdown,
you'll see the check mark next to it. And if
| | 03:27 | you're slide presentation is designed
to loop around, you don't have to worry
| | 03:30 | about looping this until it stopped.
| | 03:33 | So we won't even select
that, but it is an option.
| | 03:36 | All right, so we've got our icon down below.
| | 03:39 | It's ready to go: time to test this out.
| | 03:42 | We know we can hit Play to hear it.
| | 03:43 | We've already heard it once.
| | 03:44 | We can hit Play down here on our Control
bar. But if we really want to see it in
| | 03:48 | the presentation, we will go
down to our Slideshow button in the
| | 03:53 | bottom left-hand corner.
| | 03:54 | When we click this, it's
going to play our slideshow.
| | 03:57 | The slideshow right now, with its
transitions and so on, requires you to click
| | 04:01 | to move from slide to slide, but let's
see what it sounds like.
| | 04:06 | (Music playing.)
| | 04:37 | And the last click takes us out of the
slideshow and back to working on our presentation.
| | 04:42 | Notice the songs stops automatically at the end.
| | 04:45 | So it does play automatically
| | 04:47 | when we launch it, it plays across the
slides as we click through them, and when
| | 04:50 | we played our muted video, it
continued to play right over that video.
| | 04:55 | So when you want to add sound, remember
you can record your own sounds, attach
| | 04:59 | it to a slide, or have it
play across multiple slides.
| | 05:02 | If you are going to be creating a kiosk
type presentation that plays on its own,
| | 05:05 | and people stand there and just watch
it without having to click, then you're
| | 05:09 | going to have to adjust your
slides so they play automatically,
| | 05:12 | set up timings, but when you add audio,
you can have it just simply go ahead
| | 05:16 | and play, loop around, and never stop.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Animating Your PresentationUsing a template with animation| 00:00 | When you're up at the podium presenting
your presentation to a large audience,
| | 00:04 | you want to keep their attention, and
one of the best ways to do that is to add
| | 00:08 | animation to your slides.
| | 00:10 | You can also add animation
to contents on each slide.
| | 00:13 | We are going to start doing that now
in this chapter, starting with this
| | 00:16 | presentation, TT_Test1.
| | 00:19 | Now this is a presentation that's based
on a template; one of the easiest ways
| | 00:22 | to get animation into your
presentation is to use the appropriate template.
| | 00:27 | So in this case, we're using the Two
Trees Test. And as we move from slide to
| | 00:31 | slide, you can see we have
got a true and false question.
| | 00:34 | We have got a standard question.
| | 00:36 | We have also got a multiple choice question.
| | 00:38 | Each of these, because of
the template, has built-in animation.
| | 00:41 | We are going to check it out now.
| | 00:43 | So first, we will click slide one in
the Thumbnail pane or Navigation pane.
| | 00:48 | As you look to the left of these slides,
you are going to see these little icons,
| | 00:51 | stars, and transition effects.
| | 00:53 | That's what it means.
| | 00:54 | They've been applied.
| | 00:55 | Any slide that doesn't have one of
those has no animation or transition.
| | 01:00 | So we will click the Slide Show button
in the bottom left-hand corner to see
| | 01:03 | what this looks like.
| | 01:04 | So there is our first slide.
| | 01:05 | No animation, it just appears, and when we
click to go to the next slide, you can see
| | 01:09 | there's the question: True or False?
| | 01:11 | Right now, True and False look the
same - no special formatting - but when we
| | 01:14 | click, animated formatting is
applied to the answer True.
| | 01:19 | Click again, we move to the next slide,
and you can see it kind of fades over.
| | 01:22 | That's the Transition effect.
| | 01:24 | What the name of our CEO?
| | 01:25 | This is a standard question.
| | 01:26 | You have to come up with it.
| | 01:28 | Click to get the answer. There it is.
| | 01:29 | Jim Coyller comes in with some fancy animation.
| | 01:32 | I will click again,
| | 01:33 | just take a look at another type.
| | 01:35 | This is a multiple choice question.
| | 01:38 | In this case, when we click to get the
right answer, the wrong ones start to fade away.
| | 01:42 | They disappear, leaving us with
the correct answer, California.
| | 01:46 | Click again to go back to
editing your presentation.
| | 01:49 | All right, so where do I get this?
| | 01:51 | Well it is a template that you can
access and reformat like I did, by going to
| | 01:55 | the master and changing
backgrounds and colors schemes and so on.
| | 01:58 | But let's just go up to the
File menu. Give it a click.
| | 02:02 | Go down to New from Template
and click that, and find Quiz Show.
| | 02:06 | There it is, and as you hover over you are
going to see the different types of questions.
| | 02:10 | There are also instructions
on how to use this template.
| | 02:13 | So with it selected, you don't have to
worry about colors, fonts and slide sizes
| | 02:17 | for now, just click Choose.
| | 02:19 | It's going to open up, and you'll notice
that the thumbnails are quite huge down
| | 02:24 | the left-hand side - at least they are for me.
| | 02:25 | So I am going to go to the border,
right in between my slide and my thumbnails,
| | 02:30 | and I am just going to drag to the left
until I get them to an appropriate size.
| | 02:34 | So this is a question-and-answer type slide.
| | 02:37 | We can go in here and make changes to
the text. It doesn't have to be called Quiz Show.
| | 02:40 | It could be called whatever you want.
| | 02:42 | When you get to the second slide, you're going
to see instructions on how to use this template.
| | 02:46 | You will also see some information as to
why it's very useful. So let's do this.
| | 02:51 | Let's try adding a new slide, and
because we're using this particular template,
| | 02:56 | we're going to see some special layouts.
| | 02:58 | The animation is built into the slide layouts.
| | 03:00 | So when we click the New Slide
dropdown arrow, you will see some of the ones
| | 03:05 | you're familiar with, like Title Slide,
Title and Content, Section Header.
| | 03:08 | Then we get into some questions.
| | 03:10 | We have got a Simple Question &
Answer slide, a Detailed Question & Answer.
| | 03:14 | We have got two True or False ones:
one with the answer being true, one with
| | 03:18 | the answer being false.
| | 03:19 | There is our Multiple Choice, even one
called Item Match up, where we have matrix.
| | 03:24 | So let's go to the Multiple Choice.
| | 03:26 | We will give it a click.
| | 03:27 | We click to add our question,
about "What does Two Trees produce?"
| | 03:41 | Now it's time to put the answers in.
Notice the first placeholder
| | 03:44 | Click to add correct answer, and
then we can rearrange these if we want.
| | 03:48 | The A, B, C, D, and E that you
see is actually part of the master.
| | 03:52 | It's in the background.
| | 03:53 | So you can't change those, but
you can move these boxes around.
| | 03:57 | So let's add the correct answer, which is
Olive Oil, and we will add an incorrect
| | 04:04 | answer, and let's add a
few more that are incorrect.
| | 04:23 | Let's put All of the above for the last one.
| | 04:30 | All right, so there is our choices.
| | 04:31 | And if we want to rearrange these, we
can, just a simple matter of let's move
| | 04:35 | this one out of the way.
| | 04:37 | You will see the guides here.
| | 04:38 | We will go to Olive Oil, and we will go to the
border for that place holder and drag it down.
| | 04:44 | Well let's move this Bread up, and you
can see it's easy just to click and drag
| | 04:52 | these around until you get the right
order, and when you do, just click off the
| | 04:57 | slide to deselect everything, and let's play it.
| | 05:00 | We will go down to the Slide Show
button and give it a click and see there is
| | 05:04 | our five choices. What does Two Trees produce?
| | 05:06 | When we click, the animation we see is
the incorrect ones disappearing, leaving
| | 05:11 | us with the correct one, Olive Oil.
| | 05:14 | Press Escape to go back to the editing screens.
| | 05:18 | So a quick and easy way to get animation
on your slide presentation is to use an
| | 05:23 | appropriate template, such as our Quiz Show.
| | 05:26 | Of course, you can produce all of
these animations yourself, including
| | 05:30 | animations between slides.
| | 05:31 | We are going to start looking
at those in the upcoming movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Animating objects on a slide| 00:00 | One great way to add visual interest
to your presentation and add focus to
| | 00:06 | specific content on a slide in your
presentation is to use animation effects.
| | 00:10 | That's what we are going to do right
now with our Tour presentation, and we are
| | 00:14 | going to do this starting on slide number 2.
| | 00:16 | Now animation effects can be
applied to almost anything on a slide.
| | 00:20 | It could be your title, it could be your
bulleted list, or it could be an object, like a picture.
| | 00:24 | Let's start with a picture,
by clicking it to select it.
| | 00:28 | You'll notice on the Ribbon you have a
separate tab dedicated to animation.
| | 00:31 | We will click there, and now
it's just a matter of applying the
| | 00:34 | appropriate animation effect.
| | 00:36 | You see there is a few different
groups here: Entrance Effects, so we can have
| | 00:40 | our object appear on the slide using
a number of different effects, or maybe
| | 00:45 | leave it there on a slide and just
add emphasis to it or have it leave the
| | 00:48 | slide using Exit Effects.
| | 00:50 | So let's go to our Entrance Effects.
| | 00:52 | We will just click the dropdown at the
center, so you can see all the different
| | 00:54 | groups: Basic, Subtle, moderate
effects and some Exciting ones.
| | 00:59 | Let's go right to the Exciting ones.
| | 01:01 | We will go with Pinwheel.
| | 01:02 | Give it a click, and you'll see a quick
preview of what that looks like, and you
| | 01:06 | can see it's using certain defaults up here.
| | 01:09 | First of all, it will up here on the
slide when we click the slide during our
| | 01:12 | slideshow. That's a default.
| | 01:15 | Also, the timing will be set up
based on timings you've used in the past.
| | 01:19 | I have two seconds.
| | 01:20 | You might have one second,
but this can be adjusted.
| | 01:23 | So just bump it down to 1.7.
| | 01:26 | You might want to bump it up.
| | 01:27 | You can use the arrows or
simply type in the value.
| | 01:30 | To test it again, just click the Play
button on the far left-hand side of the Ribbon.
| | 01:34 | You get to see that affect a little
quicker that way. That looks good.
| | 01:38 | Notice also that a one appears next
to the object, indicating it's the first
| | 01:42 | animation on our slide.
| | 01:44 | There is an order, if you have multiple
animations, that needs to be considered.
| | 01:48 | So let's go to our bulleted list now,
and I like to click the border of a
| | 01:52 | bulleted list. That way
| | 01:54 | I know I'm getting the entire list, and
let's apply some effects here for emphasis.
| | 01:59 | So we don't want them appearing on the
slide. They'll be there, but we will emphasize
| | 02:02 | them as we go through them.
| | 02:04 | So click the dropdown for Emphasis
Effects, and you can see there's a whole
| | 02:07 | bunch of Basic ones, Subtle,
moderate and Exciting ones as well.
| | 02:11 | Let's go with Teeter. That's kind of neat.
| | 02:13 | Give it a click, and you can see how
each one is teetering there, and this again,
| | 02:17 | would be as we click
through the different items.
| | 02:20 | You can see On Click, 2, 3, 4 and 5, so
this is actually going to happen after our image appears.
| | 02:26 | So if we want to reorder
these, we can do that.
| | 02:30 | Let's say we want our image
here to appear with the slide.
| | 02:33 | We don't want to have to click.
| | 02:34 | We want it to appear automatically.
| | 02:37 | To make changes to it, if we try to click
it and go up your Animation options, we can.
| | 02:41 | Click the little number though, that
appears next to it, and now you have access
| | 02:45 | to those animation options.
| | 02:47 | So instead of On Click, we
have With Previous or After.
| | 02:50 | If you choose After Previous, if
there's any other animations that come before
| | 02:54 | this, happens automatically after.
| | 02:56 | If you choose With, it happens simultaneously.
| | 02:59 | Now in this case, the only thing
before our animation would be the appearance
| | 03:05 | of the slide itself.
| | 03:06 | So let's choose With Previous.
| | 03:09 | Notice now it's a 0, and
these get renumbered 1, 2, 3, 4.
| | 03:12 | All right, you want to test it out?
| | 03:15 | Let's click the Slide Show button in
the bottom left-hand corner. There it is.
| | 03:20 | Now you'll notice we have to click the
teeter each one of our bulleted items.
| | 03:26 | We will press Escape.
| | 03:28 | So we are back to editing now.
| | 03:31 | If you really want to make some
changes, for example, you want these to
| | 03:34 | automatically teeter one after the other.
| | 03:37 | Click back inside, click the border,
and now you'll notice when we do that, we
| | 03:42 | can't go up here and start
fiddling with how we start these up.
| | 03:46 | We would have to go to each of the
numbers and make changes. Or here is another
| | 03:51 | option: go up to the View menu,
go down to Custom Animation.
| | 03:55 | That opens up the Custom Animation
section of the toolbox, where you can see
| | 03:59 | each of your items.
| | 04:00 | The first one being a Content
placeholder, when we click it for our image.
| | 04:06 | And then you can see the next one represents the
entire bulleted lists, so they are all selected.
| | 04:11 | When we select Content Placeholder
here, with that little arrow, you can
| | 04:14 | expand or collapse.
| | 04:17 | You can then apply some effects or
changes to the entire group or one at a time.
| | 04:22 | So if we go down to the next one here,
which is that first bullet, notice only
| | 04:26 | the one is selected.
| | 04:27 | We can have this appear
automatically With Previous, so that means it's
| | 04:32 | automatically going to
happen when the slide appears.
| | 04:35 | Now for the next bullet, maybe we
want that to happen after the previous
| | 04:39 | animation, so we select After.
| | 04:41 | We'll do that for the other two as well.
| | 04:49 | To really test this out though, we need
to click the Slide Show button. Notice
| | 04:53 | the teetering going on, one after
the other, and our image comes in
| | 04:58 | automatically as well.
| | 04:59 | So you can press Escape.
| | 05:02 | When you're done with the toolbox,
you can close it up, but there are some
| | 05:05 | other sections down here: The Effect Options, so
you then apply options to the effect you chosen.
| | 05:10 | There is also Timings.
| | 05:13 | There is our After Previous, and so on.
| | 05:15 | So you don't have to go to the Ribbon.
| | 05:16 | You can do it all from here.
| | 05:18 | Also, change up the Speeds.
| | 05:20 | Any Delays in between, so you can
really get technical with these.
| | 05:24 | Text Animations have their own too, all
at once for a bulleted list, or you do
| | 05:28 | it by word even or letter if you wanted to.
| | 05:31 | You can see we can group text in
levels as well, reverse order is an option.
| | 05:36 | Lots of options using the toolbox,
so you can experiment with those.
| | 05:40 | We will close it up by clicking the Close button.
| | 05:43 | So there are some animations applied to
a bulleted list, applied to an object on
| | 05:47 | your slide, with all of the custom
animation options at your finger tips.
| | 05:52 | You can really keep your audience
engaged in your presentation and focus on
| | 05:57 | specific content on your
slide by using animation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using slide transition effects| 00:00 | Another type of animation that can be
applied to your presentation to add visual
| | 00:05 | interest is a transition, and that is
the animation that happens between the
| | 00:09 | slides in your presentations.
| | 00:11 | So as you move from slide
1 to slide 2, what happens?
| | 00:15 | Does the slide just appear, or is there
some kind of some transitional effect?
| | 00:19 | That's what we are going to look at
right now with our tour presentation, and we
| | 00:23 | will go to slide number 1 and start there.
| | 00:25 | Now when you look to the left-hand
side of the thumbnails in the Navigation
| | 00:29 | pane, you will get a hint as to whether
there is any animation of transitional
| | 00:33 | effects that have been applied.
| | 00:35 | Right now, next to slide 1 there is
nothing. Next to slide 2 we do see the
| | 00:38 | little star, indicating there are
some animation effects on that slide.
| | 00:42 | So with slide number 1 selected, we
will go the Ribbon and click Transitions,
| | 00:46 | totally dedicated to Transitional
Effects that can applied to your slides. And the
| | 00:51 | very first group that we see
here is Transition to this Slide.
| | 00:54 | So what's going to happen to take us
to this slide? And down below are the
| | 00:59 | options, and you can see they are
all named: Cut, Fade, Push, and so on.
| | 01:03 | We can use the arrow at the right to
scroll through the list or click the
| | 01:07 | dropdown arrow to see all of them in
groups: Subtle, Exciting, and Dynamic,
| | 01:12 | down at the bottom.
| | 01:13 | So let's just start with maybe an
exciting one, like Ripple, for example.
| | 01:19 | When you click Ripple, you're going to see
how the slide appears in that Ripple effect.
| | 01:24 | You will also see the icon that appears
now next to the thumbnail under slide 1,
| | 01:29 | indicating there is a transition effect
that's been applied to this one slide.
| | 01:33 | If you want to apply it to all of your
slides, you will notice there is a button on
| | 01:37 | the far right-hand side of the Ribbon
to have this transition applied to all of
| | 01:41 | the slides in your presentation.
| | 01:43 | That's not a bad idea.
| | 01:44 | You want to keep things consistent
and avoid distracting your audience with
| | 01:48 | too many effects. So that's a very good
button if you have a medium to small presentation.
| | 01:54 | If you have got a very lengthy presentation,
that's broken up into sections like ours,
| | 01:59 | you might consider applying the
effects to the various sections.
| | 02:02 | So you might use three or four
different transition effects throughout your
| | 02:06 | entire presentation.
| | 02:08 | Let's click Introduction, right at the top.
| | 02:10 | That's selects all of the slides
in the group, and now we will try a
| | 02:13 | different transition.
| | 02:15 | Click the dropdown, and let's
go to Vortex. I like that one.
| | 02:19 | We are going to see a quick preview of
that on our first slide, and you'll also
| | 02:24 | notice, in the thumbnail section of our
Navigation pane, we have got a little icon
| | 02:30 | appearing next to each of
the thumbnails in this group.
| | 02:34 | As we scroll down to the next section,
which is History, you'll notice that icon
| | 02:39 | does not appear there.
| | 02:40 | So let's click History, and we will
apply an effect to that section by
| | 02:44 | clicking a dropdown.
| | 02:45 | We will try something
different. How about Glitter?
| | 02:51 | We'll see a quick preview, very cool effect.
| | 02:55 | And we will scroll down now to the
next group, one more section called Sales
| | 03:00 | Information. Select it by
clicking right on the name.
| | 03:04 | Let's try one more.
| | 03:05 | We will click the dropdown.
| | 03:06 | Let's go down to the Dynamic ones now
and see what we have got here.
| | 03:09 | For example, maybe Orbit would be cool.
| | 03:15 | There we go. Nice effect.
| | 03:17 | It's been applied to all of the slides
in that section. The only other section
| | 03:22 | left is our Conclusion. We don't
have to apply any transitions to that.
| | 03:27 | There are some other options now.
| | 03:28 | Let's just go back to the very top.
| | 03:30 | We will click on the Introduction
heading to select the slides in that section.
| | 03:36 | You will see the Effect. It kind of
appears here with Effect Options.
| | 03:39 | You can click that dropdown now
and change some of these options.
| | 03:42 | Right now, the Vortex is from the Left.
| | 03:44 | You can have it coming
from the Top, Right, or Bottom.
| | 03:47 | Let's change it to Top and see what
that looks like. And there it goes.
| | 03:52 | Very cool effect.
| | 03:53 | It takes 4 seconds by default,
but we can change that up too.
| | 03:56 | If you think it takes too long, just
bump it down by tenths of a second using
| | 04:00 | the down arrow or back up using
the up arrow or type in a value.
| | 04:04 | I am just going to type in 2.
| | 04:06 | So it only takes two seconds, and we are
going to test that out now, by clicking Play.
| | 04:11 | Notice it popped back to 3.05? So when
you come inside here, with it selected
| | 04:20 | and type 2, you need to either press Return or
Tab - that's to lock it in - and now play it again.
| | 04:30 | That's a little quicker and less distracting.
| | 04:32 | The only other thing that's kind of
interesting is you can add sound to it as well.
| | 04:37 | When you click the sound dropdown, you will
see a number of built-in sounds to choose from.
| | 04:41 | So if we wanted to, we could scroll
through this list, finding something that
| | 04:45 | goes with our vortex.
| | 04:48 | See what Oooh sounds like.
And now when we click Play...
| | 04:53 | (Audio playing.)
| | 04:57 | It doesn't really apply, and in fact, it
might be too distracting, so we will go back
| | 05:01 | and select, right at the top, None.
| | 05:04 | Now by default, every time you click,
you're going to move from one slide to the
| | 05:07 | next, and you'll noticed On Mouse
Click has been used in this particular
| | 05:12 | transition by default. But if you want it
to automatically play - let's say you're
| | 05:15 | doing a self running slide show at a kiosk -
| | 05:19 | in that case, you'd want to choose a
timing. So you'd take On Mouse click off by
| | 05:24 | selecting the check box,
| | 05:25 | click After, and then choose the number of
seconds before it moves to the next slide.
| | 05:32 | So of course you probably want to read
what's on the slide and gauge how long
| | 05:36 | the slide needs to appear.
| | 05:37 | In this case, we would be applying it
to every slide in this section because
| | 05:40 | that's what we have done.
| | 05:41 | We have selected all of the slides.
| | 05:42 | But you can do it for each
individual slide as well.
| | 05:45 | You are going to turn that off
and go back to On Mouse Click.
| | 05:48 | If we really want to see the effect,
we will click the Slide Show button.
| | 05:52 | There is the first slide using the
effect. Click again. See how it goes to the
| | 05:58 | next slide using the same effect.
| | 06:00 | You'll see the animations we
applied in the previous lesson.
| | 06:03 | Click again to move to the next
slide, and it's a very consistent look.
| | 06:07 | When we get to the end of the slide in
our first section and go on to the next
| | 06:14 | one, we see the new effect,
kind of a cool effect.
| | 06:18 | Press Escape to go back to editing
your presentation, and now you know that
| | 06:22 | adding transitions to the slides in
your presentation can really add that 'wow'
| | 06:26 | factor, keep your audience
engaged, and keep it exciting.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Proofing Your ContentChecking spelling| 00:00 | So you've got your presentation
ready to display in front of your huge
| | 00:04 | audience, and the last thing you want
is to have spelling errors on any of the
| | 00:08 | slides in your presentation, so
there is some functionality built into
| | 00:11 | PowerPoint to help you with that.
| | 00:13 | We are going to work with our TT_Tour
presentation here. We're on slide number
| | 00:17 | one. And to check the spelling, the
easiest way is to simply go up to tools and
| | 00:23 | select Spelling, at the very top.
| | 00:24 | Now this opens up a little window that
we can move around our screen, and you
| | 00:31 | can see it's going to go to the first word
| | 00:32 | it doesn't recognize in the dictionary,
in this case hometown missing the e, and
| | 00:38 | you can see what slide it's on.
| | 00:39 | It's selected over here in the Navigation pane.
| | 00:41 | It's slide number two.
| | 00:43 | So now have some options.
| | 00:45 | First of all, you'll see down below
Suggestions for the correct spelling of
| | 00:49 | hometown, and since there's only one,
it appears in the Change to field.
| | 00:53 | So there's the incorrect spelling at
the top, and that's what we can change
| | 00:57 | it to, if we go over to the right-hand side,
and we change it by clicking the Change button.
| | 01:03 | Now if you wanted to ignore this -
it's not a typo, maybe proper names, for
| | 01:07 | example we'll see in a moment,
| | 01:08 | you've got some Ignore options.
| | 01:10 | We can change it here or every time we
see hometown without the e, change them
| | 01:15 | all in this presentation.
It will happen in an instant.
| | 01:19 | We can even add it to the dictionary
or get other suggestions, but we've got
| | 01:22 | the right word there.
| | 01:23 | All we have to do now is click
Change, and it's fixed for us.
| | 01:27 | So notice, now on the slide, it's
corrected, and it moves on to the next
| | 01:31 | word, for word 'favourite.'
| | 01:33 | Now you can spell the word favourite this way.
| | 01:36 | The US spelling we wouldn't the U,
but in Canada and Great Britain, for
| | 01:40 | example, we would use the U. So in this
case, you'll see the correct spelling -
| | 01:45 | the US dictionary is the default
dictionary that's being used - and you can see
| | 01:49 | some other Suggestions down
below, including the plural.
| | 01:52 | So in this case, you might want to add this
to the dictionary, by clicking the Add button.
| | 01:57 | That way it will never stop at this
word again and treat it as a spelling
| | 02:01 | error, or you might choose to ignore
it. By clicking Ignore, you simply skip
| | 02:06 | over it, and it goes on to the next
slide where it finds a word that's not in
| | 02:10 | the dictionary; in this case
you can see it's a proper name.
| | 02:13 | Now this name does appear throughout
our presentation so this is an ideal
| | 02:17 | scenario for clicking the Ignore All button.
| | 02:20 | You could even add it to the dictionary,
but you have to be careful about how
| | 02:23 | much you add to the dictionary here
in PowerPoint, and keeping in mind that
| | 02:27 | the dictionary we use here is shared amongst
all of the applications in the Office 2011 Suite.
| | 02:33 | So it's usually best just to choose
Ignore All, so it won't stop at every
| | 02:38 | occurrence of that proper name, and now
we arrive at one that's really just the
| | 02:42 | short form for picking, and
that's a good one to Ignore.
| | 02:46 | Here we see the word, or the
abbreviation for continued without the period, so in
| | 02:51 | this case we might want to change that.
And if you know it appears more than once,
| | 02:55 | choose Change All, and it
won't stop at the other.
| | 02:58 | Same thing goes for ounce.
| | 02:59 | You can see that does appear several times.
| | 03:02 | And on your slide, whenever you see
something with that red squiggly line under
| | 03:06 | it, that's the spelling being checked
and corrected sometimes on the- fly.
| | 03:12 | In this case, when you see the red
squiggly line it hasn't been corrected, but it
| | 03:15 | has been shown to you, and that's
spelling as you go: something we'll talk about
| | 03:20 | in a minute when we look at the Preferences.
| | 03:23 | So in this case we do want to
choose Change All to change them all, and
| | 03:26 | eventually there will be no other
spelling mistakes found, or typos, and you'll
| | 03:32 | see this message, spell check is
complete. All I have to do is click OK.
| | 03:36 | That doesn't necessarily
mean there are no errors.
| | 03:39 | Sometimes you might mean to type one
word and you type another word, just type
| | 03:44 | something by mistake that happens to be
an actual word. And in those cases you
| | 03:48 | still want to proof the
slides in your presentation.
| | 03:51 | Let's go up to PowerPoint for a moment,
click it, and go to Preferences, because
| | 03:57 | over here you'll see the Spelling option,
and there are number of check boxes,
| | 04:01 | most of which are checked off.
| | 04:02 | Check spelling as you type.
| | 04:03 | That's the red squiggly line.
| | 04:05 | If you like seeing that, right away,
creates a glaring image on your screen that
| | 04:10 | tells you there's something wrong,
| | 04:12 | if you like that, keep it checked.
| | 04:13 | If you don't like those red squiggly
line showing up all over the place, just
| | 04:16 | simply uncheck this.
| | 04:18 | Hide spelling errors is another option,
if you want to see them, and you can
| | 04:22 | keep this checked off and just simply
turn these on and off as to your liking.
| | 04:26 | Always suggest corrections. The suggestions
that you see are because this is checked off.
| | 04:31 | We can ignore words in
uppercase and with numbers.
| | 04:34 | So if there are any combinations
where you've got letters and numbers,
| | 04:38 | alphanumerics, or a word is in all
uppercase, sometimes acronyms appear that way,
| | 04:44 | they'll be ignored.
| | 04:45 | So you won't have to skip over them
when you're running your spellchecker, just
| | 04:48 | so long as these are checked off.
| | 04:50 | So you've also German post-reform
rules being used by default, and you can
| | 04:53 | see we've got French modes here,
Traditional, New spelling, Traditional and new
| | 04:57 | spellings, combining them both.
| | 05:00 | So we'll just click Cancel here, so we
don't actually change anything, and click
| | 05:04 | off the slide to deselect
anything that has been selected.
| | 05:08 | So that's there is to checking your spelling.
| | 05:10 | Once you've got your presentation
ready to show in front of your audience -
| | 05:13 | again, the worse thing would be to
have typos and spelling errors up there
| | 05:18 | for everyone to see -
| | 05:19 | run the spellchecker as one of the
last things you do before saving your
| | 05:22 | presentation and showing it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding synonyms, definitions, and translations| 00:00 | When you're working with text in your
presentation the occasion may arise where
| | 00:04 | you need to find a definition for a
word, or maybe you need to find synonyms, or
| | 00:09 | even translate a word or two.
| | 00:11 | Well, these are all reference tools
that are built into the Microsoft Office
| | 00:14 | 2011 Suite of Applications, and we
have access to them from PowerPoint.
| | 00:19 | So we're going to take a look right now
using our TT_Tour presentation, and lets
| | 00:24 | us go down to slide 4 for a second,
where we see the Endorsement. Maybe we
| | 00:29 | need to find a better word for 'standards.'
| | 00:31 | We see that down at the end of a paragraph.
| | 00:33 | There are a couple of things we can do
to access the built-in Thesaurus.
| | 00:38 | One option is to go up to Tools and then
down to Thesaurus, and notice it opens up
| | 00:43 | our Reference tools, and
Thesaurus is opened up at the top here.
| | 00:47 | I'll just close that up for a second
because we would have to type in the word
| | 00:51 | standards and then find the meanings
and so on and then insert the word that we
| | 00:56 | want, but where would it be inserted?
| | 00:57 | So, before you open the
Reference tools, there is a better option.
| | 01:01 | Double-click the word first to select it -
| | 01:04 | you can click and drag too, if you want -
and now right click or Ctrl+Click, so
| | 01:09 | you'll notice we have the ability
here to access our Reference tools.
| | 01:15 | We're going to go down to Look
Up, across and down to Thesaurus.
| | 01:20 | This opens up the exact same thing we
saw a moment ago in our Reference tools,
| | 01:24 | but this time the word
'standards' is already there.
| | 01:27 | We see some meanings down
below and some synonyms.
| | 01:30 | So if the meaning of standards is
values - maybe its criterions actually -
| | 01:36 | you can see the synonyms that we're
looking for standards here include things
| | 01:39 | like benchmarks and paradigms, and all
we have to do is move down and find the
| | 01:44 | one that we're looking for,
| | 01:46 | let's go with specifications and then
click Insert, and it replaces the word
| | 01:51 | that was already highlighted. Standards
is now specifications, just like that.
| | 01:56 | Now when we're done with the Reference
tools, we can close then up or just leave
| | 01:59 | them open off to the side and
continue to work on our presentation.
| | 02:03 | Now let's scroll down a little bit further.
| | 02:05 | We'll go to Our Story here. And you
can see where it all started in 1903,
| | 02:11 | beginning in Italy, and
moving to upstate New York.
| | 02:14 | And let's say we wanted to
look for the translation for farm.
| | 02:18 | Wouldn't it be nice to use
the Italian word for farm here?
| | 02:22 | So let's double-click farm.
| | 02:24 | Now we can also access the Reference
tools by clicking the Reference tools
| | 02:28 | button on the toolbar.
| | 02:29 | This will show or hide the toolbox,
which includes our Reference tools.
| | 02:34 | You'll notice the word farm is not
already there. So it's almost always best to
| | 02:38 | select the word, Ctrl+Click or right-
click and then go down to, in this case,
| | 02:43 | not Look Up, but Translate.
| | 02:45 | And when we do that, you can see now we
are back in our Reference tools here with
| | 02:49 | the word farm at the top.
| | 02:50 | We're still looking at the Thesaurus, but
down at the bottom we also have Translation.
| | 02:55 | Here all you have to do is choose the
languages you want to convert to and from.
| | 02:59 | In this case, it's an English word
so we need that in the From field.
| | 03:03 | To, we would select Italian, if you
don't already have it, and there it is.
| | 03:07 | There are the words that we're looking for.
| | 03:09 | Now in this case we don't have an
Insert button, so we would actually have to
| | 03:13 | select these words and copy them if
you wanted to do it that way, or just
| | 03:17 | simply go over here where we see farm
on our slide and type in what we see in
| | 03:21 | our Reference tools.
| | 03:22 | So it's now quite as automated as the
Thesaurus, but it's there if we need it.
| | 03:28 | The other things you'll find here in
Reference tools include a Dictionary,
| | 03:32 | so let's just click the little arrow
next to Translation to collapse that, and
| | 03:36 | we'll go to Dictionary.
| | 03:38 | If you see a message saying that
online tools haven't been activated, there
| | 03:43 | should be a link to do it, and then all
of these functions become available to you.
| | 03:48 | The dictionary, you can see with
farm still selected down below.
| | 03:52 | You can see the noun.
| | 03:53 | You get some definitions.
| | 03:56 | So if there's a word you're not sure
about in your presentation, and you're
| | 03:59 | going to be talking about it, you
might want to look up the meanings.
| | 04:04 | And once again, when you're done with
the Reference tools, just close them up and
| | 04:08 | go back to working on your presentation.
| | 04:11 | So it's not just checking your spelling.
| | 04:12 | There is a built-in Thesaurus for
Synonyms when you can't find that perfect word.
| | 04:17 | You can translate words, even look up
the meanings of words so you know what you
| | 04:20 | are talking about when you present.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting AutoCorrect options| 00:00 | If you've ever been typing away,
adding text to a slide in your presentation,
| | 00:04 | and you know you've made a typing error and
you go back to fix it, and it's not there,
| | 00:09 | the good news is you're not losing your
mind; what's happening is PowerPoint is
| | 00:12 | automatically correcting certain things for you.
| | 00:15 | AutoCorrect is part of the Microsoft
Office Suite, and it's available here in
| | 00:19 | PowerPoint of course.
| | 00:21 | We're going to take a look at it
now, using our TT_Tour presentation.
| | 00:24 | We're going to go to slide two,
where we see our bulleted list.
| | 00:27 | First, let's see it in action.
| | 00:29 | We'll click after the fourth bullet
point, press Return like we are going to
| | 00:32 | start a new one, and let's type in,
'Your most embarrassing moment.'
| | 00:37 | We'll type in the word Your without
capitalizing it, y-o-u-r, and then leave a space.
| | 00:44 | Automatically, it's capitalized, and you
may have seen something flash under the
| | 00:48 | Y. Well if you click anywhere inside
the word 'Your,' you'll see what it was.
| | 00:53 | It's that little icon
representing the AutoCorrect button.
| | 00:57 | And it's actually a menu.
| | 00:58 | When you click this, you'll see a few options.
| | 01:00 | We can undo that capitalization if
we really didn't want it, but we do so,
| | 01:04 | we won't select that.
| | 01:06 | We can stop automatically capitalizing
first letters of sentences, which is an
| | 01:10 | option that can be turned on or off.
| | 01:12 | We can do it right from here.
Or we can go right to the AutoCorrect
| | 01:16 | Options, which is the same as
going to PowerPoint > Preferences and
| | 01:19 | selecting AutoCorrect.
| | 01:21 | Let's just leave it for now.
| | 01:22 | We'll just fill in the rest of our text
by clicking after 'Your,' and we'll just
| | 01:26 | type in 'most embarrassing moment.' There we go.
| | 01:31 | We don't need another one after 5. That's good.
| | 01:33 | So there we go. We've got our text in there,
and it was automatically fixed for us.
| | 01:37 | Other things happen as well.
| | 01:38 | Let's go up to 'Your favourite olive oil flavor.'
| | 01:42 | Over here, just left of 'flavor,' you can
click before the f and put in a round
| | 01:46 | bracket. And really, your
favorite olive oil means 'the flavors.'
| | 01:51 | So let's type in the word the, but we'll
type t-e-h, a common typo, and hit the Spacebar.
| | 01:57 | It gets fix. It's automatically
replaced with the correct word, t-h-e.
| | 02:01 | So you can see, AutoCorrect is
automatically on, doing things for us.
| | 02:07 | So let's check out those Preferences.
| | 02:09 | Again, we could click in the word,
click the button, and select Control
| | 02:13 | AutoCorrect Options, or go to
PowerPoint, select Preferences, and make sure
| | 02:20 | AutoCorrect is selected.
| | 02:22 | Here you'll see AutoCorrect and
AutoFormat options in this window.
| | 02:26 | So what's going on here?
| | 02:27 | Well, Show AutoCorrect Options Button, we
saw the button when we click back in the word.
| | 02:31 | It appeared under the letter that was fixed.
| | 02:34 | Correct TWo INitial CApitals.
| | 02:36 | If you accidentally hold the Shift key
too long when you're trying to capitalize
| | 02:39 | something and you get two capitals,
it will take out the second one for you.
| | 02:44 | Capitalizing the first letter of sentences,
we saw that with our new Bullet point.
| | 02:48 | Names of days will automatically be fixed.
| | 02:50 | You can turn any of these off with
their check boxes and then down below,
| | 02:54 | Replace text as you type.
| | 02:56 | And this is the long list, down
below, of things that will be replaced.
| | 03:01 | You'll see in the left-hand column
what's being replaced and in the right-hand
| | 03:04 | column what it's being replaced with.
| | 03:07 | Sometimes people type corporation
without the r. It is a common typo.
| | 03:13 | There is the correct spelling.
| | 03:14 | You can select any one of these and
delete them if you don't want them, but you
| | 03:18 | can also add things as well.
| | 03:19 | Let's just scroll down to the Ts
because the one that we tried was the word
| | 03:24 | t-e-h, and it was replaced with the word 'the,'
and if you scroll down you'll find it there.
| | 03:36 | There we go; teh is replaced with the.
| | 03:40 | So let's say you want to add your own.
Maybe you get tired of typing Two Trees
| | 03:44 | Olive Oil Company. Well, in that case, in
the Replace field you type in what it is
| | 03:49 | you're going to type.
| | 03:51 | Let's try ttooc, short for
Two Trees Olive Oil Company.
| | 03:58 | Well in that case, it's a bunch of
letters that would never appear as a word
| | 04:02 | on their own anyway.
| | 04:03 | So we'll go over to the With field
now and type it in the way we want it to
| | 04:07 | appear: Two Trees Olive Oil Company.
| | 04:15 | I better spell it correctly. There we go.
| | 04:21 | This is something I've used forever.
| | 04:23 | I once worked for a number of years
at the Children's Hospital of Eastern
| | 04:27 | Ontario and what a pain it
was to type that all the time,
| | 04:30 | so using the short form
like this is a great option.
| | 04:33 | Now all you do is click Add to add it,
and from now on you'll be able to type
| | 04:37 | ttooc to get the Two Trees Olive Oil Company.
| | 04:40 | So let's click OK, and let's try this out.
| | 04:47 | Let's double-click the Introductions
title here on slide two, and type 'ttooc,'
| | 04:54 | and nothing happens till you either
press Return or hit the Spacebar, so
| | 04:58 | PowerPoint knows that's the
end of what you're typing.
| | 05:00 | We'll hit the Spacebar.
| | 05:01 | There it is: Two Trees Olive
Oil Company, just like that.
| | 05:05 | What a nice time saver.
| | 05:07 | So anytime where you think you're
making a typo, you go back to fix it, it's
| | 05:10 | been fixed for you, it's AutoCorrect.
| | 05:12 | If they're certain options that you
don't like about AutoCorrect, remember you
| | 05:16 | can go to the Preferences
and change them anytime.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Showing Your PresentationUsing speaker notes| 00:00 | So the time has finally arrived.
| | 00:02 | You are getting ready to give your
presentation. The audience will be looking at
| | 00:06 | your slides while you speak.
| | 00:07 | You might want to use speaker notes,
| | 00:10 | have some notes up there with you so
that you know what to say as each slide
| | 00:14 | comes up on the big screen.
| | 00:15 | That's what we are going to do right
now, working with our TT_Tale presentation.
| | 00:19 | On slide 1, you will notice down at the
bottom, there is an area to click to add
| | 00:23 | notes, and if we click in there, we can
start typing in our own speaker notes.
| | 00:28 | That's what this area is reserved for.
| | 00:30 | If you want more room, just to the
border, move your mouse pointer up, and as
| | 00:33 | you have it over the border, you will
see that double arrow. And now, you can
| | 00:36 | click and drag that up. And it's going
to shrink down our slide, but give you
| | 00:40 | more room to type in your actual notes.
| | 00:43 | So these are notes to yourself, notes
that you can have with you up at the
| | 00:47 | podium, for example, while you speak.
| | 00:50 | So this case, what should we be
saying of a slide is up on the big screen?
| | 00:54 | Well, we want to welcome the
audience. You can press Return.
| | 01:02 | You are working with text now,
just like you were on your slide.
| | 01:05 | You have all of your
formatting options if you wanted to.
| | 01:08 | After we welcome the audience, I am
going to press Return to leave an extra
| | 01:11 | space and just type in
one more reminder to myself.
| | 01:15 | All right, so it will just give a
quick background on what's going to happen.
| | 01:37 | There we go, so we got some notes for slide 1.
| | 01:39 | If we go to slide 2 by clicking the
thumbnail in the Navigation pane, you can
| | 01:43 | see, there are some notes here already.
| | 01:45 | We can edit these notes; for example,
I'm take off the capital G in 'Give,'
| | 01:51 | type in "Start with yourself and then
give the audience members 2 minutes each
| | 02:04 | to go through this list".
| | 02:06 | Let's go to slide 4 now.
| | 02:08 | You can see there is some additional notes
here using bullets, and you can use bullets.
| | 02:11 | You can turn bullets on. All of the
formatting options you are accustomed to
| | 02:15 | using in slides can be
applied to your speaker notes.
| | 02:18 | So that's getting them in here in
your presentation. How do you use them?
| | 02:21 | Well, one option is to just change
the view for a second to see what
| | 02:25 | they're going to look like.
| | 02:26 | Go up to View, and you will notice
one of the options is Notes Page.
| | 02:32 | When you click it you're going to see
exactly what this will look if you were
| | 02:35 | to print it out: a miniature of your
slide, so you know you can match the
| | 02:39 | slides you are talking about with what's on the
big screen, and then your notes appear down below.
| | 02:44 | All right, let's go back to Normal View,
and the other thing you'll probably
| | 02:48 | want to do then is to print these out.
| | 02:51 | When you go up to File and choose Print, you
can choose what it is you're going to print.
| | 02:56 | By default, PowerPoint thinks you are
about to print your slides, but click the
| | 02:59 | Slides button for Print What, and select Notes.
| | 03:04 | Now you'll see a little preview
thumbnail here of what you notes pages are
| | 03:07 | going to look like.
| | 03:08 | You can move through them, navigating using the
navigation buttons down below. There is slide 4.
| | 03:14 | When we get there, miniature of
the slide in color with our notes.
| | 03:18 | Now if you don't want to use up all of
the color in your laser or ink printer,
| | 03:22 | you can go to the Output and change it to
Grayscale or Black and White. I like to do that.
| | 03:27 | There's no need for fancy slide
thumbnail; just a black and white version is
| | 03:32 | fine, so long as I know what slide I should
be talking about, and my notes appear down below.
| | 03:37 | Then off you go to print those, and
you will have them now when you go to
| | 03:40 | present in front of the
audience. We will click Cancel.
| | 03:43 | So the Speaker Notes area down below
can be very useful if you want to take
| | 03:47 | notes with you up to the
podium while you present.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Showing and navigating a presentation| 00:00 | When it's finally time to play your
slideshow to present in front of that of audience,
| | 00:05 | there are a number of different methods
for starting your slideshow, and there are
| | 00:08 | some navigation
techniques you should know about.
| | 00:11 | We are going to talk about those now,
continuing to work with our TT_Tale
| | 00:14 | presentation here, and we are
going to start at slide number 1.
| | 00:17 | With the Home tab selected on the Ribbon,
let's go to the very far right-hand side.
| | 00:21 | You'll notice the last
button is the Play button.
| | 00:24 | So we'll simply click the Play
button to start our slideshow.
| | 00:27 | Notice that it starts right from the
slide we are looking at, the current slide,
| | 00:31 | which is our first slide, and now it's
taking up the full screen. And to move from
| | 00:35 | one slide to the next,
| | 00:37 | there are number of different options.
| | 00:38 | Let's start by clicking the
left button on your mouse.
| | 00:41 | If you have got a single
button mouse, no problem;
| | 00:43 | you just click the button, and
it moves you to the next slide.
| | 00:47 | Now any animations and customizations
or transitions, you'll see those happen
| | 00:52 | automatically if they're set up that
way. And another option for moving to the
| | 00:56 | next slide is just press Return on your
keyboard. It takes you to the next slide as
| | 01:01 | well. Or hit Page Down on your keyboard.
| | 01:04 | That will take you to the next slide.
Or press the down arrow cursor key to
| | 01:10 | move to the next slide.
| | 01:13 | Try the right arrow this time.
| | 01:16 | That works too. And since all of these
keys work, their opposites also work.
| | 01:20 | If you need to go backwards, say you
need to go back a slide, try the left arrow
| | 01:24 | cursor key, and it takes you
back a slide. Try Page Up.
| | 01:31 | That takes you back a slide as well.
And if you're using your mouse, you can
| | 01:37 | right click, and that's going to show
a little menu that allows you to choose
| | 01:42 | where you want to go: to the Next
slide or there it is, the Previous slide.
| | 01:47 | And if you have got a
single button mouse, no problem;
| | 01:49 | that's a Ctrl+Click.
| | 01:50 | You'll see this menu as well.
| | 01:52 | You can even go to the Last Viewed
slide, so if you are jumping around, or go to a
| | 01:57 | specific slide if you needed to.
| | 01:59 | So if you want to go to the Giving
Back slide, we can click it here. It takes us
| | 02:03 | directly to that slide.
| | 02:05 | You can right-click or Ctrl+Click again.
Or here's a neat one: just move your
| | 02:10 | mouse button down to the bottom-left corner.
| | 02:11 | You'll see some Navigation buttons
here as well, for moving back and
| | 02:15 | forward, and you'll also see the
little menu button that you can click to
| | 02:19 | see those options again.
| | 02:21 | So if you want to go to the last viewed slide,
wherever that was, it will take you there.
| | 02:25 | In this case, because we jumped a number of
slides, we are taken back a number of slides.
| | 02:29 | Try the arrows in the bottom left-hand corner.
| | 02:31 | Temporarily, your mouse pointer does disappear.
| | 02:33 | We are going to talk about the pointer
in the next movie, but right now we'll
| | 02:37 | just move it around till we see those
options in the bottom left-hand corner.
| | 02:41 | We will click the left arrow to go
back a slide, click the right arrow to go
| | 02:44 | forward. And at any time if you need to
leave the presentation, just press Escape
| | 02:50 | on your keyboard, and you will be taken
back to the Normal view if that's where
| | 02:55 | you came from when you played the
slideshow, and you will be looking at the
| | 02:58 | slide you just left off during the slideshow.
| | 03:01 | Now another option for playing your
slideshow is just to go down to the bottom
| | 03:05 | left-hand corner and click the Slideshow
View button, and you'll notice it takes
| | 03:10 | off right where you were, at the current slide;
| | 03:12 | that's the default. And we will press
Escape to leave again, and this time let's
| | 03:16 | go back to the Ribbon.
| | 03:18 | We won't click the Play button, but
rather the dropdown arrow next to it, and
| | 03:22 | you will see we can play this from the start.
| | 03:24 | No matter what slide you're looking at,
when you click Play from Start, it
| | 03:27 | will go back to the very first slide, or the
default, which is to Play from Current Slide.
| | 03:33 | So let's go to Play From Start, and
now it's just a matter of using the navigation
| | 03:40 | methods that you prefer.
| | 03:41 | I typically don't like to have the mouse up
there if I don't need it. Things can go wrong.
| | 03:46 | I like the keyboard. Pressing Return
is a great way to move from one slide to
| | 03:50 | the next. Or if you prefer the cursor
keys, they allow you to normally move
| | 03:55 | ahead, but also move back,
as do Page Up and Page Down.
| | 03:59 | Now at anytime during your
presentation, if you need to pause for questions,
| | 04:04 | let's say, and you don't want people
just reading slides, you can also choose
| | 04:07 | from that menu - which is accessible
by moving down to the left-hand corner
| | 04:11 | and clicking the menu button or just
right clicking anywhere - and you will
| | 04:15 | see a Screen option here.
| | 04:17 | We can have a black screen
or a white screen temporarily.
| | 04:20 | When you click either of these, the
screen goes blank, whether it's black or
| | 04:24 | white, but you will also see
your navigation buttons down below.
| | 04:27 | So you go back to your arrows to move
from one slide to the next, and so on.
| | 04:32 | Let's press Escape to go back to our
Normal view where we might want to continue
| | 04:36 | working on our presentation.
| | 04:38 | So when it's time to show people you
what you have done, to play your slideshow
| | 04:42 | there is a number of different ways
to play the show. There is number of
| | 04:44 | different methods for navigating
the slides in your presentation.
| | 04:47 | There are also some options for using
a pen to draw attention to sections of
| | 04:53 | your slides, and that's we are
going to talk about in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using pointer options| 00:00 | When you're playing your slideshow and
presenting to your audience, you may need
| | 00:04 | to highlight specific areas of a slide,
and on those occasions you can access
| | 00:09 | some of the many Pen modes
available to you here in PowerPoint.
| | 00:12 | We are going to look at those
now using our TT_Tale presentation.
| | 00:15 | We left off on slide number 3.
| | 00:18 | Let's go to slide 2 by clicking in the
Navigation pane, and now we will play
| | 00:22 | our slideshow. You can click the Play
button, or if you prefer click the Slide
| | 00:27 | Show button in the bottom left-hand
corner. And you can see your mouse pointer
| | 00:31 | disappears, the slide appears, it's
fullscreen, any animations, transitions, etc,
| | 00:36 | also appear on your screen.
| | 00:38 | Now if you move your mouse, it takes
a second, but eventually the arrow
| | 00:42 | reappears, and you can use
this to move around the various slides.
| | 00:46 | You could point the things on your
slide, but you can't actually draw on the
| | 00:50 | slide, and if you wanted to do that,
you would actually switch modes.
| | 00:54 | Let's talk about those modes
now. The mode we're in right now,
| | 00:57 | if you don't touch your
mouse for a couple of seconds,
| | 00:59 | the arrow disappears.
| | 01:01 | That's called Automatic, and it's the default.
| | 01:03 | If we move down to the bottom left-hand
corner, you'll notice one of the icons
| | 01:07 | is a pen, with the default
color of red showing up.
| | 01:10 | When we click there, we will see
the different modes and their keyboard
| | 01:14 | shortcuts, which is ideal, if you don't
like popping this menu up all the time.
| | 01:18 | Automatic is checked off,
Command+U gets us to that mode.
| | 01:22 | There are other modes though. If you
never want to see that pointer,
| | 01:25 | you might choose hidden, Command+I.
Or if you prefer to see the arrow all the
| | 01:30 | time and not have it disappear,
Command+A or choosing Arrow from this menu, and
| | 01:35 | then Command+P is your Pen mode.
| | 01:37 | If you want to draw on the screen -
and remember this is not affecting the
| | 01:41 | content of your slide,
| | 01:42 | you just want to drawn
onscreen to highlight areas -
| | 01:44 | you can choose Pen mode.
| | 01:46 | Now when you do that, you'll notice
your mouse pointer turns into a pen, and
| | 01:51 | you have the ability to go back to
that pen at anytime and choose the pen
| | 01:54 | color of your choice.
| | 01:56 | In this case, you can see the default set to red.
| | 02:00 | Let's go to green, though.
| | 02:01 | We will select green.
| | 02:02 | It's more applicable to our Two
Trees Olive Oil. And now let's say as our
| | 02:06 | audience members go down this bulleted list,
| | 02:08 | we can check them off as they complete them.
| | 02:10 | So audience member number 1 states
their name, we just check it off like so.
| | 02:14 | Or maybe you prefer to circle the number.
| | 02:17 | As they get to number 2. You can click
and drag your mouse to draw around the 2,
| | 02:22 | or underline, or you could circle
the entire bullet if you wanted to.
| | 02:27 | Again, you're not drawing on the slide itself;
| | 02:29 | it's on the screen, it's an overlay,
and this can be reset at anytime.
| | 02:33 | So go back down to the
bottom left corner of our screen.
| | 02:36 | You could also right click to get the
menu, but click the Menu button, move up
| | 02:40 | to Screen, and select Erase Pen,
and now you can start over.
| | 02:45 | You might want to change colors too.
| | 02:46 | We will go back down to the Pen > Pen
Color and choose something that will show
| | 02:50 | up better on our slide, maybe a darker
color like blue, for example. And now,
| | 02:55 | as audience member number 2 continues
with the bulleted list, we can start
| | 02:59 | checking them off or x-ing them off.
| | 03:02 | It's up to you how you use the pen.
| | 03:05 | Now when you want to go back to one of
those modes to go on to the next slide,
| | 03:08 | for example, you want to be able to
navigate, you can go back down to the
| | 03:11 | pen, or you could right click to see the menu,
and we will just choose one of the other ones.
| | 03:15 | I like to use the keyboard shortcuts,
because that way people don't need to see
| | 03:18 | this menu popping up. So let's try that.
| | 03:20 | We will go back to our slide and
Command+U gets us back to Automatic.
| | 03:25 | So let's try that, Command+U switches
us back to a pointer, and that pointer
| | 03:30 | disappears after a few seconds, and
now we can click to move on to the next
| | 03:35 | slide. And if we go back, just try Page
Up, or the up arrow on the cursor
| | 03:40 | keys to go back, you'll
notice the pen marks are gone.
| | 03:44 | Press Escape to leave the presentation.
| | 03:48 | So with the different modes available
to you and their keyboard shortcuts, you
| | 03:51 | can switch as you're playing your
slideshow. Pen mode allows you to access
| | 03:55 | different colored pens to
highlight areas on your slide.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using presenter tools with two screens| 00:00 | When you're presenting to a large
audience, typically you're going to have your
| | 00:04 | own computer and screen - maybe it's a
laptop - and then perhaps a projector
| | 00:08 | projecting the image onto the big
screen for your audience to look at.
| | 00:12 | Now I've been using PowerPoint
and presenting for a very long time.
| | 00:16 | I always wished that I could see more
information on my screen, such as what's
| | 00:21 | the next slide coming up, my speaker
notes perhaps, and let the audience only
| | 00:25 | see the slide itself.
| | 00:27 | This is called Presenter
view here in PowerPoint 2011.
| | 00:29 | We're going to explore it now
using our TT_Tale presentation here.
| | 00:34 | To access Presenter view,
you can go to the View menu.
| | 00:37 | You'll see Presenter view right there
and the keyboard shortcut. Or from the
| | 00:41 | Ribbon, if you've got the Play button,
just click the dropdown arrow next to
| | 00:45 | that Play button; you'll see
Presenter view here as well.
| | 00:48 | When you select it, your screen looks
a whole lot different than it did just
| | 00:52 | simply playing the slideshow.
| | 00:54 | If you've got the second
screen hooked up, or the projector,
| | 00:57 | right now, your audience
is seeing the first slide.
| | 01:00 | That's what you see in your view on the left.
| | 01:03 | You also get a sneak peek at the
next slide, so you can set it up.
| | 01:06 | They don't see this, but you look like
a genius knowing exactly what's coming.
| | 01:11 | You're also going to see the current time.
| | 01:13 | This is handy as a presenter, when you
need to be on time with your presentation.
| | 01:18 | You're going to see an elapsed time
as well, so the second you start your
| | 01:21 | presentation, the clock starts running.
| | 01:24 | Also, you're going to see your
speaker notes just below the slide, and any
| | 01:28 | speaker notes that appear
under the upcoming slide.
| | 01:32 | If it's kind of hard for you to read,
you can adjust the font size. Click and
| | 01:35 | drag the slider up or down until you
achieve the font size you're looking for.
| | 01:40 | You'll also have navigation
buttons for going backwards and forwards
| | 01:44 | through your presentation.
| | 01:45 | So if you like to use a mouse, go
ahead and do that. Or those keyboard
| | 01:49 | shortcuts also work.
| | 01:50 | For example, if you press Return,
you move on to the next slide.
| | 01:55 | So this, again, is what you're
audience sees, including your mouse pointer.
| | 02:00 | You can access the Pen
mode, and so on, the menus.
| | 02:03 | You get a sneak peek of the next slide.
| | 02:05 | Notice the elapsed time starts the
moment we moved to that first slide.
| | 02:09 | Now there are also some tips.
| | 02:12 | If you click the Tips up at the top,
these are Presenter View Tips such as the
| | 02:16 | keyboard shortcuts for
moving from one slide to the next.
| | 02:19 | So you may already be using some of these,
like RETURN, Page Down, and the down arrow.
| | 02:24 | You can type the letter N, as a next.
| | 02:26 | Of course, the mouse button also works.
| | 02:29 | If you want to go to the previous slide,
you've got all of those shortcuts as well.
| | 02:32 | If you want to jump to a specific slide, you
can try the number followed by the RETURN key.
| | 02:37 | B to black the screen, W
to white out the screen.
| | 02:42 | You can start and stop a
self-running show or restart it.
| | 02:46 | Escape, just like we've been using
in previous slideshows, takes us out.
| | 02:51 | If you have hidden slides, you can use a
letter H to go to that next hidden inside.
| | 02:55 | Just click OK when you're
done looking at the tips.
| | 02:57 | All right, so let's try some
of those, like the Spacebar.
| | 03:01 | Yes, it takes us to the next slide.
| | 03:03 | Let's say we want to go to slide 20.
| | 03:06 | Well, all we need to do is type in
the number 20, followed by Return, and it
| | 03:12 | takes us to slide 20, our Sales Results.
| | 03:14 | You also get a sneak peek at slide 21.
| | 03:16 | You want to go back to slide one?
Type in the number 1 and press Return.
| | 03:22 | Takes you write back to the
beginning of your presentation.
| | 03:26 | So Presenter view can be a huge
advantage to you as a presenter.
| | 03:30 | Notice in the top-right corner, you'll
also see exactly what slide you are on
| | 03:33 | and how many slides are on your presentation.
| | 03:35 | All of the information you
need is at your fingertips.
| | 03:39 | What the audience sees is exactly what
you want them to see: the current slide.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a self-running slideshow| 00:00 | You know, not every presentation you
create using PowerPoint will be displayed in
| | 00:04 | front of a huge audience, with you at
the podium speaking about the content
| | 00:08 | they're seeing on the slide.
| | 00:09 | Sometimes, you may want to create a
presentation that's self-running, such as
| | 00:14 | you'd see at a kiosk, where a people can
stand in front of the monitor and just
| | 00:18 | watch the information go by.
| | 00:20 | In those cases, you want to create
the self-running show using many of the
| | 00:24 | tools that are available to you here in
PowerPoint 2011 to make it as seamless as possible.
| | 00:29 | We're going to take a look at those
now using our TT_Tale presentation.
| | 00:33 | We're going to go to slide
one by selecting the thumbnail.
| | 00:36 | So we're right at the top.
| | 00:38 | The first thing we're going to
do is check out the animations.
| | 00:42 | When you see transition and animation
icons next to the slides, you know that
| | 00:47 | there are some special effects.
| | 00:49 | When you go to Transitions, for
example, you'll see what's selected.
| | 00:53 | But what's more important is what's
appearing over here under Advanced Slide.
| | 00:58 | Notice by default, it's on the mouse click.
| | 01:00 | So as you play your slideshow, you have
to click, or use a keyboard shortcut to
| | 01:04 | move from one slide to the next.
| | 01:06 | Well, if you're going to create a
self-running slideshow, people won't be
| | 01:11 | able to click the mouse;
| | 01:12 | instead, you might want to use timings.
| | 01:14 | So with our first thumbnail selected -
and you can click it again to make
| | 01:18 | sure it's selected -
| | 01:19 | we're going to use a keyboard
shortcut to select every slide in our
| | 01:22 | presentation, so we don't have to go from
one to the next, to the next, applying a timing.
| | 01:26 | Let's just do Command+A on the keyboard.
| | 01:29 | You'll notice every thumbnail now
appear selected as you scroll down the list.
| | 01:34 | So we can apply a timing to every single slide.
| | 01:37 | Let's do that by deselecting On
Mouse Click and selecting After.
| | 01:42 | We'll leave it at 1.00 second just for now.
| | 01:44 | That makes no sense whatsoever.
| | 01:46 | It doesn't give people enough time to
read the content on a slide, but just to
| | 01:50 | see the effect and save us some time.
| | 01:52 | All right, so now if we go back up
to the first slide here and start our
| | 01:57 | slideshow by clicking the
Slide Show button let's say,
| | 02:01 | you'll see the transition effect.
| | 02:04 | Then it only takes a second
before we're on to the next slide.
| | 02:07 | Now this particular slide has some
animations, which does give a little bit of
| | 02:11 | time to take in all of the content
before the next slide appears. It only appears
| | 02:16 | for a second, and on it goes.
| | 02:18 | Of course, one of these slides here,
we just didn't have enough time to view
| | 02:22 | all of the information.
| | 02:23 | So let's press Escape, and press Escape
again if you need to, to go back to Normal view.
| | 02:30 | We'll scroll up to the top, to slide number one.
| | 02:32 | Now timings have been applied to every
single slide: one second each. That's easy.
| | 02:39 | There is another tool though that's
excellent for rehearsing the timings, and
| | 02:43 | saving those timings.
| | 02:45 | Let's go to the Slide Show
tab this time on the Ribbon.
| | 02:49 | You'll notice one here for rehearsing.
| | 02:52 | When you click Rehearse, you're
going to go to Presenter view, and right
| | 02:56 | away the current slide,
you can see, is being timed.
| | 03:01 | A Tale of Two Trees, New Hire Orientation.
| | 03:03 | You can rehearse this.
| | 03:05 | Then move to the next slide by using the arrows,
or Page Down if you prefer, or the Spacebar.
| | 03:10 | All of those keyboard shortcuts work.
| | 03:12 | That timing, 13 seconds, is saved with the slide.
| | 03:16 | Now we go through this slide, reading the
information, and then move to the next one.
| | 03:21 | That timing is saved with the slide.
| | 03:24 | The total time is also being calculated here.
| | 03:27 | Let's use Page Down this
time to go to the next slide.
| | 03:31 | You need to have enough time to read all this,
| | 03:33 | so you would read it to yourself before
moving onto the next slide, so you know
| | 03:36 | that your viewers will have enough time
to read it themselves, and then on you
| | 03:40 | go to the next slide, and so on.
| | 03:43 | Let's click the Exit Show button.
| | 03:45 | Look what happens when you do this.
| | 03:47 | The total time for the
slide show was 00:00:41 seconds.
| | 03:50 | Do you want to save those slide timings?
| | 03:52 | You didn't have to
remember them, or write them down.
| | 03:54 | They'll be saved with the
slide. You just say Yes.
| | 03:57 | Then you're taken directly to Slide
Sorter view, which will display the
| | 04:02 | timings under each slide.
| | 04:05 | You can see the ones that we didn't
apply a special timing have that default we
| | 04:10 | set up earlier of one second for each slide.
| | 04:14 | Now we can make this a self-running
slideshow, which means here, under the Slide
| | 04:19 | Show tab on the Ribbon, we can use the timings.
| | 04:23 | When you choose Use Timings, it's
automatically going to go from one to the next.
| | 04:28 | Now let's just go back for a second to
our Normal view, because the other thing
| | 04:32 | you might want to do is hide certain slides.
| | 04:34 | For example, this second slide is very
useful for a live audience where each of
| | 04:38 | the members is going to state
their name, their hometown, and so on.
| | 04:42 | But for a self-running slideshow, it
doesn't make sense to have this in here.
| | 04:46 | Well, you can right-click the thumbnail.
| | 04:48 | You will see an option to hide the slide.
| | 04:50 | It also appears under the Slide
Show tab here in the Set Up section.
| | 04:54 | You can click it there as well.
| | 04:56 | You can see it's just grayed out.
| | 04:58 | It won't be viewed in the
presentations. It'll be skipped right over.
| | 05:01 | That's perfect for a self-running slideshow.
| | 05:04 | If we go back to the Animations now,
you'll notice that everything is kind of
| | 05:08 | grayed out, because we're on a hidden slide.
| | 05:10 | If we go back to slide one by
clicking the thumbnail, notice that we don't
| | 05:14 | really have an option here,
because we're using timings.
| | 05:16 | So you don't have to set up how
animation happens, and how the
| | 05:20 | transitions happen.
| | 05:21 | Let's go to Transitions here for a second.
| | 05:23 | Notice On Mouse Click is not selected anymore.
| | 05:26 | It's After the number of
seconds we saved with our rehearsal.
| | 05:31 | So all of that's automated for you.
| | 05:32 | All you need to do now is play
the slideshow. So let's do that.
| | 05:36 | We'll go down to the Slide Show
button, or you can use the Play
| | 05:39 | button, whatever you like.
| | 05:42 | There is our first slide.
| | 05:42 | Now it's not going to stay there for a
second this time, because we rehearsed the
| | 05:46 | timings. It stays there for a few more
seconds before moving on to the next slide,
| | 05:51 | automatically using those timings.
| | 05:55 | There is our Welcome!
| | 05:57 | Not much to look at on the slide,
| | 05:59 | so it's a shorter timing,
before it moves on to the next slide.
| | 06:03 | This one will stay there a little bit
longer to get people enough time to read it.
| | 06:06 | You can press Escape at
anytime to leave that slideshow.
| | 06:10 | Of course, if you're at a kiosk,
people can do the same thing.
| | 06:13 | They can press Escape to leave the
slideshow, or you can lock the keyboard away,
| | 06:17 | so all they see is the screen, and they're
forced to look at the content on that screen.
| | 06:23 | So those are some of the options
for creating a self-running slideshow.
| | 06:28 | If you want people to be able to stop
by a kiosk, for example, and look at
| | 06:32 | information you've created,
| | 06:34 | all of these tools are available to you
in PowerPoint 2011 to create the perfect
| | 06:38 | self-running slideshow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Playing a self-running slideshow| 00:00 | When you design your slideshow to be a
self-running slideshow, there are certain
| | 00:05 | setup options you need to consider.
| | 00:06 | We're going to look at those now before
actually playing the slideshow itself.
| | 00:11 | We're continuing to work
with our TT_Tale presentation.
| | 00:13 | We're at slide number
one in the Navigation pane.
| | 00:17 | Before we play our presentation,
we're going to look at some of the options
| | 00:20 | by clicking the Slide Show tab on the
Ribbon, and then clicking the Set Up
| | 00:24 | Show button from here.
| | 00:26 | Now this opens up a little window
where you'll see some different options for
| | 00:31 | how this presentation will be displayed.
| | 00:34 | Right at the top is Show Type:
Presented by a speaker using full screen, or will
| | 00:39 | be Browsed by an individual in a window,
or Browsed at a kiosk (full screen)?
| | 00:43 | In this case, this is the ideal option,
the third one for us, because we don't
| | 00:48 | want people actually clicking the mouse
to move from slide to slide; otherwise,
| | 00:52 | we would choose the next one here,
which is Browsed by an individual.
| | 00:56 | Then down below the Show Options,
| | 00:57 | we can see what happens.
| | 00:58 | When we choose kiosk, look what
happens to Loop continuously until 'Esc'.
| | 01:02 | It gets checked off, and we
can't change that. It's at a kiosk.
| | 01:07 | If the user has access to the keyboard they
can press Escape to stop the presentation.
| | 01:12 | But if the keyboard is locked away,
like many people do, then they're forced
| | 01:17 | just to sit there and
read the slides as they go by.
| | 01:19 | It will start over at slide
one when it reaches the end.
| | 01:23 | Now if there are any narrations
that have been added, any animations,
| | 01:27 | you can choose whether
or not they will be shown.
| | 01:29 | So by default, narrations and
animations will be visible on the slide,
| | 01:34 | but you can turn those off by
clicking the appropriate check box.
| | 01:38 | So without the animations, the
slides may not be as distracting.
| | 01:42 | But we're going to keep those on
and take out any narrations.
| | 01:46 | Down below, what slides are
going to be presented? All slides.
| | 01:49 | However, if you do have hidden
slides, they will not be included.
| | 01:53 | You can also choose the
number of slides to be viewed.
| | 01:56 | So if you want to see only maybe slides five
through 10, you can do that by selecting From.
| | 02:02 | Let's go to slide 3, and
just to save us some time,
| | 02:05 | we can use the down arrow to bump this
down from our total of 26, or click and
| | 02:10 | drag over what's there.
| | 02:11 | Let's just do a few slides.
| | 02:12 | We'll do that maybe 3 to 8.
| | 02:16 | Manually should not be used for a kiosk.
| | 02:18 | Using the timings, if they're present,
which they are when you've set them up.
| | 02:21 | Using the rehearsed timings, or by
applying the timings to your transitions.
| | 02:26 | With those being used, we can click OK.
| | 02:28 | You want to save your changes,
and then play the slideshow.
| | 02:33 | You can do that right from the Play
Slide Show button, in that group, or click
| | 02:37 | the Slide Show button.
| | 02:38 | However, you like to do it.
| | 02:39 | Let's see what slide pops up.
| | 02:43 | There it is, slide three.
| | 02:44 | We're only viewing the slides, three, I guess
all the way to 8 is what we selected.
| | 02:50 | The timings are going to be used.
| | 02:51 | We're seeing the animations in
between the transitions, for example.
| | 02:55 | Any hidden slides will not appear.
| | 02:57 | The timings are also being used here,
so people have enough time to read what's
| | 03:02 | on the slide before the next slide appears.
| | 03:05 | I like to rehearse my timings,
and then add a few seconds.
| | 03:08 | Not everybody reads at the same speed.
| | 03:12 | Now eventually, when we get to slide
number eight, it's going to loop around and
| | 03:17 | start over at slide three, because we
chose that range of slides. There it is.
| | 03:23 | Like the message said in our window, this
will continue to loop until we press Escape.
| | 03:28 | Press Escape on your keyboard to return
to the previous view here, our Normal view.
| | 03:33 | So when you do create a self-running
slideshow, remember the Set Up options to
| | 03:39 | ensure that the presentation itself
will be viewed the way you want your
| | 03:43 | viewers to see it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding hyperlinks to a presentation| 00:00 | Another option for displaying the
slides in a presentation for playing a slide-
| | 00:04 | show is to give the viewer full control.
| | 00:07 | That's what we're going to do right now,
adding some tools like hyperlinks that
| | 00:10 | will give them control, allowing them
to visit web sites or send e-mails or
| | 00:15 | even access other files.
| | 00:16 | We'll continue to work with our TT_
Tale presentation here. The first thing we
| | 00:20 | need to do though, is change it from a
self running slideshow by clicking the
| | 00:24 | Slide Show tab here and clicking Set up Show.
| | 00:28 | The third option is what we see with
this particular presentation, and we don't
| | 00:32 | want it browsed at a kiosk, just
sitting there looking at information; we want
| | 00:35 | the individual to browse through the slides.
| | 00:38 | So that's the second option.
| | 00:39 | When we do that, we then see
Loop continuously turned off for us.
| | 00:43 | We can turn that back on. And we can
choose whether or not we're going to show
| | 00:46 | narrations and animations.
| | 00:48 | Let's allow both to be shown by
deselecting those check boxes.
| | 00:52 | The slides, let's switch it back to
all slides. Any hidden slides will not be
| | 00:56 | included in this, but all the other
slides will be visible to the viewer. And of
| | 01:01 | course down below we want them to
manually advance through the slides, as opposed
| | 01:05 | to using the timings. So we'll click OK.
| | 01:07 | Now it's time to insert our hyperlink.
| | 01:11 | So let's just scroll down to slide number 6.
| | 01:13 | This is an ideal slide here for a
link to a web site. And we can link to an
| | 01:17 | e-mail, we can also link to a specific
file, but we're going to add a hyperlink
| | 01:22 | that takes us to the Two
Trees Olive Oil web site.
| | 01:25 | Now, you'll notice if you go to the
Insert menu, Hyperlink appears at the
| | 01:29 | bottom - Command+K is the keyboard shortcut -
but it's not available to us quite yet.
| | 01:33 | First, you need to select something.
| | 01:36 | It could be an object, it could be text,
or you can add something and create a
| | 01:39 | hyperlink from that.
| | 01:41 | That's what we're going to
do down here in our slide.
| | 01:42 | So I'll just click in the slide, go
back to the Home tab, and click Text, and
| | 01:49 | choose Text Box, right at the top.
| | 01:52 | Now I can click where we want the
hyperlink to go, and the hyperlink doesn't
| | 01:56 | have to be the actual web address at this
point, just the text that people will see.
| | 02:00 | So, for example, 'Visit our
website by clicking here!'
| | 02:11 | So that's the text that's going to be the link.
| | 02:13 | To set up the link, we need to either
select a portion of this text, like the
| | 02:17 | word 'website' or just click the
border of the text box to make the entire
| | 02:21 | object a hyperlink.
| | 02:23 | Now, with something selected, when
we go to the Insert menu and down to
| | 02:27 | Hyperlink. It's available to us. Give it a
click, and you can see we have options now.
| | 02:32 | We can link to a web page, and there's
the Link To field where we type in the
| | 02:35 | web site, or we can link to a separate
document, allowing us to select the file
| | 02:40 | and in fact, if you want to go to a specific
location in the file, you could use anchors.
| | 02:45 | So the file itself like a Word document,
for example, might have an anchor in
| | 02:48 | there, and we can locate that anchor
right from here. Or maybe it's something
| | 02:52 | like a 'Contact us' hyperlink where
you want them to send an e-mail.
| | 02:57 | Well, it will launch their e-mail application.
| | 02:59 | It will go to the address
you type in the To field.
| | 03:02 | So probably somebody like information@
twotreesoliveoil.com, and you can even
| | 03:07 | add the subject so they don't have to enter
that, just add the body text and off they go.
| | 03:12 | But we're going to add a web page, and
in the Link To field is where we're going
| | 03:17 | to type in the address to twotreesoliveoil.com.
| | 03:21 | Now when you start typing WWW,
the http is added for you.
| | 03:25 | So you don't have to worry about that and the
colon and the slashes; just get that in there.
| | 03:29 | What's displayed? The Selection in Document;
| | 03:31 | we selected our text box.
| | 03:33 | The other thing you can do if you want,
as people hover over the hyperlink, is
| | 03:38 | to show a little screentip, and in this
case you might want to type in the web
| | 03:42 | address or something, but you don't
have to use it. You can click Cancel here and
| | 03:45 | then just click OK.
| | 03:46 | So now we have our hyperlink, but it
really doesn't look like a hyperlink.
| | 03:52 | It doesn't look like anything
special, anything different than the text
| | 03:55 | that appears up above -
| | 03:56 | a little smaller maybe,
| | 03:58 | but typically hyperlinks are really
visible when they appear in another color,
| | 04:03 | like blue with an underline. So let's do that.
| | 04:06 | Let's change the font color to a nice dark blue.
| | 04:12 | Let's underline it as well, so
we can do all of this formatting.
| | 04:15 | Now it looks like a hyperlink, and we
can test it by going to the Slide Show
| | 04:19 | button in the bottom left-hand
corner here. It starts our slideshow.
| | 04:23 | You'll see any animations and
transitions, and so on. And to test out the
| | 04:28 | hyperlink, just as you move your mouse
over the link itself, you can see your
| | 04:33 | mouse pointer turns into that little
pointing finger, indicating it is a live
| | 04:37 | link. And if we click it, it's
going to launch your default browser -
| | 04:40 | in my case, that's Safari - and takes me
directly to the web site that was our hyperlink.
| | 04:45 | There it is. It looks great!
| | 04:47 | So we go up to Safari and Quit.
| | 04:51 | It takes us back to our presentation.
| | 04:53 | You can press Escape to go back to our Normal
view, and continue working on our slideshow.
| | 04:59 | So that's all there is to adding hyperlinks.
| | 05:01 | Now, there is another option we're
going to look at in the next lesson, which
| | 05:04 | is Action Settings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using action buttons| 00:00 | Similar to hyperlinks, Action
buttons in PowerPoint allow you to create
| | 00:05 | specific buttons on your slides and
then assign actions to those buttons, such
| | 00:10 | as hyperlinking to a specific slide or
accessing a document, a web site, and so on.
| | 00:16 | So, we're going to take a look at
Action buttons now, continuing with our
| | 00:19 | TT_Tale presentation, and let's say we go
down to the very last slide in our presentation.
| | 00:26 | Let's remove the last two slides, actually.
| | 00:28 | So we'll click thumbnail 25, press
Delete on your keyboard and Delete again to
| | 00:34 | remove that other one.
| | 00:35 | Now, we've got just a single conclusion
slide, and we want this to be the last
| | 00:39 | slide in our presentation.
And when the viewer gets to this slide,
| | 00:43 | we want them to be able to easily go back to
the first slide and start over if they want to.
| | 00:48 | So we're going to add an
Action button that does that.
| | 00:51 | We can add the Action buttons
by going to the Slide Show menu.
| | 00:55 | You'll see Action Buttons, and that
little arrow means there are some preset
| | 00:59 | options to choose from, off to the right here.
| | 01:01 | You can draw your own custom buttons,
but there are some presets as well,
| | 01:06 | like Home, for example.
| | 01:07 | This would be good for taking us back to
the very first slide, or we could choose
| | 01:11 | First Slide, and just a
different looking button.
| | 01:15 | If you want to go to Information,
maybe it's a document that you've created
| | 01:19 | and people can access.
| | 01:21 | Same thing goes for Help. Or if you
wanted to access a specific document, you can
| | 01:26 | use the Document action
button, or play sounds and movies.
| | 01:30 | Let's go to the one that we need that's
going to take us back to the very first slide.
| | 01:35 | We'll click First Slide, and all that
does is changes our mouse pointer into a
| | 01:39 | crosshair. We're ready to draw the button now.
| | 01:41 | So, you just go on the slide where you
want to draw the button and click and drag.
| | 01:45 | I'm going to make mine extra big so
it's obvious here in the bottom right-hand
| | 01:48 | corner by clicking and dragging.
| | 01:50 | And when we let go, we have the button,
but we also see the Action Settings open
| | 01:55 | up, and there are two different
types of settings we can create here.
| | 01:59 | First of all, what happens
when we click this button?
| | 02:02 | The Mouse Click category here down below
has it already set up for us because of
| | 02:06 | the preset we chose.
| | 02:08 | It's going to hyperlink us to the first
slide, but other options include running
| | 02:13 | a program, macros, playing sounds.
| | 02:16 | If we go to the Mouse Over section by
clicking Mouse Over, we see those same
| | 02:19 | options, but in this case you
don't have to click the button.
| | 02:22 | You just have to move your
mouse pointer over the button.
| | 02:25 | So all of those options here as well.
| | 02:27 | Let's go back to Mouse Click.
| | 02:30 | We'll just click OK.
| | 02:32 | We now have the button.
| | 02:33 | We can test it out.
| | 02:35 | Let's go to the Slide Show button,
down the bottom left-hand corner.
| | 02:38 | We'll give it a click.
| | 02:40 | So we arrive at the last slide.
We're in control of the presentation as the
| | 02:44 | viewer. We go over to the button.
You notice your mouse pointer changes into
| | 02:48 | pointing finger, indicating
this is some kind of link.
| | 02:51 | When we click it, it takes us right back
to slide number 1, and we can start over.
| | 02:56 | Let's press Escape.
| | 02:58 | So those are the presets, but you can
create your own out of any object or text
| | 03:02 | box even, for example.
| | 03:04 | Let's say, on our first slide, we want
to create some buttons that allows us to
| | 03:07 | jump to the various sections.
| | 03:08 | We have a History section.
| | 03:09 | We have a Sales section and our Conclusion.
| | 03:12 | In that case, we draw our own shapes.
| | 03:14 | Let's go up to the Insert group on
the Home tab of the Ribbon here, click
| | 03:17 | the Shape dropdown, and select Rectangles,
and let's go to a rounded rectangle perhaps.
| | 03:23 | There's that crosshair again.
| | 03:25 | We're going to click and drag, let's say,
in the bottom left-hand corner here, to
| | 03:28 | create what will be a button that
will take us to the History section.
| | 03:32 | So let's double-click inside.
| | 03:34 | We'll type the word 'History.'
| | 03:38 | The formatting is already done for us,
but we have access to all the formatting
| | 03:42 | options we do when working with shapes.
| | 03:44 | So if you want to find a different
format, maybe a raised button, so it's got
| | 03:48 | a 3-D effect to it.
| | 03:49 | Let's go to the one of these down
here near the bottom. There we go.
| | 03:55 | So, once you've got your formatting,
and you've got your button created, it's
| | 03:59 | time to assign those actions.
| | 04:01 | So we'll do that by making
sure the button is selected.
| | 04:04 | If it's not, just go over to the button
itself and click. And you can place it,
| | 04:07 | of course, by going to the border.
| | 04:09 | You can resize it, and then you're
going to go up to Slide Show, and you'll
| | 04:13 | notice Action Settings, just below
Action Buttons, is available to us because we
| | 04:18 | have something selected.
| | 04:19 | Now we can also access those from
the Slide Show tab on the Ribbon.
| | 04:24 | You'll see an Action Settings
button here in the Setup group.
| | 04:27 | So we will give that a click, and
this is the same thing we saw when we
| | 04:30 | created our preset. But in this case, because
it's a custom button, nothing has been assigned,
| | 04:35 | no actions here when mouse
clicking and no actions when mousing over.
| | 04:40 | So, let's go to the Mouse Click.
| | 04:41 | In this case, we want to
hyperlink to a specific slide.
| | 04:45 | So we're going click Hyperlink to.
| | 04:47 | We'll click the button that currently says
Next Slide and go down to selecting a slide.
| | 04:53 | So, we've got to find an option here
that's going to allows us to choose the
| | 04:56 | slide we want to go. In this case, it's Slide.
| | 05:00 | Now we get to see little thumbnails
of our slides. And as you scroll down,
| | 05:04 | eventually we'll see the History slide.
| | 05:06 | That's the beginning of the History
section, if you were to scroll down and look
| | 05:09 | at the section headings
over in the Navigation pane.
| | 05:12 | So, when we to click OK,
| | 05:13 | it's now going to hyperlink to History.
| | 05:16 | If you want to hear a sound
when you click it, you can do that,
| | 05:18 | if you want it highlighted. I like these
things to happen sometimes when we mouse over.
| | 05:23 | So let's go over to the Mouse Over
category, and we'll play a sound, just so we
| | 05:27 | know that we're over the button.
| | 05:29 | You can click the dropdown. Lots of
different sounds to choose from here, so
| | 05:33 | we'll just scroll down until we see something
like Take Off that's going to take us off to the next section.
| | 05:40 | We can also have it
highlighted when we move over it.
| | 05:43 | Clicking that check box means we'll see
the button light up in some fashion when
| | 05:48 | we move our mouse over it.
| | 05:49 | So we'll click OK. Now, here's the neat thing.
| | 05:52 | You've got it created.
All you have to do is copy it.
| | 05:56 | Let's do a Command+C on the keyboard and
then paste it with Command+V. And we'll
| | 06:01 | do it twice because we have
a couple of other sections.
| | 06:04 | Now we've got our buttons.
| | 06:05 | We can just move them around and line
them up by clicking and dragging their
| | 06:11 | borders. And when we've got them in place,
we can start doing some editing with
| | 06:19 | those Action Settings.
| | 06:20 | So the second one is not History,
but its going to be Sales, so just
| | 06:24 | double-click and type Sales.
| | 06:25 | The third ones is going to be the
Conclusions, so we'll double-click in
| | 06:28 | there and type in Conclusion.
| | 06:32 | Let's go back to the first button.
| | 06:33 | We'll just click and go up
to our Action Settings button.
| | 06:36 | Here you can see it's
still hyperlinking to History.
| | 06:39 | In this case, we want to choose
different slides so we'll click Slide, and this
| | 06:44 | is going to take us down to our Sales.
| | 06:49 | There's Sales Information right there, and
we'll click OK. And then of course we've got
| | 06:53 | our Conclusion, so we'll have to
click OK, click Conclusion, back to Action
| | 06:58 | Settings, and this one is going to
hyperlink to our conclusion, which happens
| | 07:04 | to be the last slide.
| | 07:05 | So you can choose the Last Slide, or
if you want to be specific, click Slide
| | 07:08 | again, scroll all the way down
to the Conclusion, and click OK.
| | 07:13 | When you click OK, you've created your
three Action buttons now. They're ready to use.
| | 07:17 | Let's just test this out by going
to our Slide Show button. There we go.
| | 07:24 | We're on our first slide.
We want to go to History.
| | 07:26 | (Audio playing.)
| | 07:31 | So here you can see it is highlighted
around the outside, and we heard our sound.
| | 07:36 | We might want to remove
that if it's too distracting.
| | 07:38 | When we click this button, we're going to
be taken directly to the History section.
| | 07:43 | Now, let's just right-click anywhere here.
| | 07:46 | You might want to have buttons that
take you to the last viewed slide.
| | 07:49 | You can create action buttons for that or
just right-click and from the menu, select that.
| | 07:54 | You'll notice the Conclusion
button looks a little bit different.
| | 07:57 | I don't know if you saw what
happened there, but let's press Escape.
| | 08:00 | When you click inside a button on the text,
the text becomes a link, not the button.
| | 08:04 | So if we go up to Action Settings now - just
to fix this up we'll choose None and click OK -
| | 08:12 | now, our text goes back.
| | 08:13 | It's no longer a link, and we
want to make sure we click the button.
| | 08:16 | So go around the border when
you see the four-sided arrow.
| | 08:19 | If we go up to Action Settings now,
| | 08:20 | you can see what was set up.
| | 08:22 | There's the copied link to History, and
here's where we want to choose the Last
| | 08:26 | Slide or the Conclusion.
| | 08:28 | Let's do Last Slide this time, and click OK.
| | 08:31 | So that's all there is to
creating your own custom Action buttons.
| | 08:37 | Remember, you have those presets to
choose from, but when you want to create
| | 08:40 | your own custom actions and action
settings, you can use any shape, any object on
| | 08:46 | a slide; simply assign the actions, and
you're giving your viewer full control
| | 08:50 | over the presentation they're looking at.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Sharing Your PresentationUsing comments| 00:01 | There are several reasons why you might
want to share a presentation with someone else:
| | 00:04 | maybe you want to create the
presentation for the speaker and you need to hand
| | 00:09 | it off to them, or maybe you're
collaborating on a project where you have
| | 00:13 | multiple people inputting
slides to a presentation.
| | 00:16 | In those cases, you might want to make
use of a handy tool we're going to look
| | 00:19 | at right now for adding comments.
| | 00:21 | We'll work with our Sharing1
presentation, a short version of the
| | 00:24 | NewHire Orientation.
| | 00:27 | Let's go to slide 2.
| | 00:28 | You'll notice in the thumbnails over
here in the Navigation pane, this one is
| | 00:32 | dimmed out, and it's got the No
sign, indicating it's a hidden slide.
| | 00:36 | So we might want to explain that to
the people we're collaborating with.
| | 00:40 | This is not to be confused with the
speaker notes that appear across the bottom.
| | 00:44 | This is for the presenter.
| | 00:45 | The notes we're about to add are for
the people we're collaborating on this
| | 00:48 | slide presentation with.
| | 00:49 | We'll do that by clicking the Review tab,
and the group in the left-hand side is
| | 00:55 | titled Comments. And here is where we
go to add New Comments, delete existing
| | 01:00 | ones, edit existing ones,
and navigate them as well.
| | 01:04 | Let's start by adding a new comment.
| | 01:06 | So we click the New button.
| | 01:07 | It looks like a sticky note.
| | 01:09 | You can think of it that way.
| | 01:11 | It's not something that's
going to appear on the slide.
| | 01:13 | You'll never see it during the presentation.
| | 01:15 | It's just for people who are working on the
particular slide where we've added this note.
| | 01:19 | So let's add a note.
| | 01:20 | You'll see your own name across the top
in the Title bar, along with the date and
| | 01:25 | a flashing cursor,
waiting for you to start typing.
| | 01:28 | We'll just type in some text,
like "This slide is hidden in the
| | 01:31 | self-running version only."
| | 01:33 | The other thing you're going to
notice is your initials and the number,
| | 01:37 | in this case 1, representing the
first note in this presentation.
| | 01:40 | Now, you can close it up, clicking the
Close button in the top-right corner. Just
| | 01:44 | click anywhere outside on the slide
itself or off to the side, and you'll just
| | 01:48 | see the icon indicating
there is a note on this page.
| | 01:52 | Now, the other thing that happened is
all of these buttons became available.
| | 01:56 | So if you want to edit the note,
just click the Edit button.
| | 02:00 | It brings it back, and you can add or remove
text if you needed to. We'll close it up.
| | 02:05 | Let's go down to Slide4,
| | 02:07 | the Endorsement, and let's add one more here.
| | 02:10 | We'll click the New button.
| | 02:12 | Notice the number that appears next to
your initials is 2, the second note, and
| | 02:17 | we'll just put in some
information for contacting Samara.
| | 02:21 | Make sure we type her
name correctly. There we go.
| | 02:29 | We'll close it up, and now we've got
two notes, which means we can now use our
| | 02:33 | Navigation buttons to go to the previous note.
| | 02:35 | It'll take us not only to the slide
with a note, but open it up as well, or go
| | 02:39 | to the Next note, same thing.
| | 02:41 | Notice the Show button is pressed by
default, indicating we're going to see these notes.
| | 02:46 | Even if we click off to the side
here, we'll see the little icon
| | 02:49 | representing the note.
| | 02:50 | Unless you don't want to see those,
click the button, and then they'll disappear.
| | 02:55 | Click it again to bring them back.
| | 02:57 | Now, like I said, this won't show
up on your presentation when you play
| | 03:00 | the slideshow itself.
| | 03:01 | Let's go down to the Slide Show button.
| | 03:03 | We'll give it a click to display the slide.
| | 03:06 | We see the effects, the content, but we
don't see that Note icon. Press Escape.
| | 03:11 | So comments can be very handy in helping
you collaborate with others on a project.
| | 03:17 | If you want to remove notes, you can go
to the Delete button, which is a dropdown,
| | 03:21 | and choose from three options:
| | 03:23 | Delete the current comment.
| | 03:24 | That's the one that's on
the slide we're looking at.
| | 03:26 | If there is more than one on a slide -
then you can add as many notes as you like
| | 03:30 | or comments on a single slide -
| | 03:32 | you can delete all the comments on a
slide. Or if you want to remove them all
| | 03:36 | from the entire presentation - let's
say at the end everything is finalized -
| | 03:40 | click Delete All Comments in Presentation.
| | 03:43 | They're all removed, and
then you can save your changes.
| | 03:46 | So if you are collaborating with
others on a presentation, why not take
| | 03:49 | advantage of the Comments that never
appear in the presentation itself? But as
| | 03:54 | you're working on the slides, you'll be
able to communicate with those others.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing notes, handouts, and slides| 00:01 | One way of sharing your presentation
with others is the old-fashioned way of
| | 00:05 | just simply printing it out.
| | 00:07 | You can print slides.
| | 00:08 | You can print your speaker notes.
| | 00:09 | That's very handy if you're
going to be up at a podium.
| | 00:11 | You can even print out handouts for
your audience members so they can see a
| | 00:15 | miniature of the slide, maybe even
have an area where they can take notes.
| | 00:19 | These are all options when it comes to printing.
| | 00:21 | We're going to do that
using our Sharing presentation.
| | 00:23 | So the first thing is to go to the Home tab,
and we're going to go to slide number 1.
| | 00:29 | I want you to see the slide, because it's
really full of graphics and a lot of color.
| | 00:33 | So I want you to imagine printing this
out using maybe an inkjet printer, for
| | 00:37 | example, and how much ink it would take.
| | 00:40 | So there are some Print
options to consider as well.
| | 00:43 | We'll do that by going up to the
File menu and then down to Print.
| | 00:47 | Command+P is your keyboard shortcut,
and it'll take you to the Print window,
| | 00:51 | where we can choose a number of different
options, such as the printer you're using.
| | 00:56 | If you have more than one
printer, you can select it from here.
| | 00:59 | There are presets for Standard, Last
Used Settings, and you can even save
| | 01:03 | your own presets, but the presets are set
down below. And there are different categories.
| | 01:08 | You should see Copies & Pages by default.
| | 01:10 | Here is where you set the number of
copies, what slides you're going to print -
| | 01:15 | all the slides or select slides, such
as from 1 to 3, for example - or Selected
| | 01:20 | Slides, which allows you to choose
the slides you're going to print.
| | 01:24 | It doesn't mean you have
to print slides, however.
| | 01:28 | Let's go to the Print What dropdown,
and you'll see Handouts and Notes as well.
| | 01:35 | When you choose Notes, you're going to
see this little thumbnail change to show
| | 01:39 | you a miniature of the slide itself,
and then the speaker notes down below.
| | 01:44 | If you're the presenter, this is a nice
thing to have with you up at the podium
| | 01:47 | if you're not in Presenter view let's say.
| | 01:51 | Let's go back to this dropdown for Print
What and look at some of the Handout options.
| | 01:56 | You might want to have 2, 3, 4 slides per page;
| | 01:58 | let's try 4 slides per page.
| | 02:00 | You can see what that looks like.
| | 02:02 | You're going to see thumbnails of
the various slides on your page.
| | 02:06 | Now, you're going to see a preview of
1 of 1, because we have Selected Slides.
| | 02:10 | Well, let's go to All Slides and
see what happens. There they are:
| | 02:14 | little miniatures of each slide.
| | 02:16 | If that's too difficult to read, you
might want to change it from 4 slides per
| | 02:20 | page to something like 2,
| | 02:21 | and you get bigger versions. All right!
| | 02:25 | Down below the Output, you can see
it's set to Color by default, and that all
| | 02:28 | depends on the printer that's
connected to your computer right now.
| | 02:32 | If we click the dropdown, we can
go to Grayscale or Black and White.
| | 02:36 | I like Black and White because as
you're going to see, what happens here on our
| | 02:40 | slides, we're going to be using black
ink, and we're not going to be using as
| | 02:44 | much ink as well because of the
backgrounds that were in color, and so on.
| | 02:47 | We could also go to Grayscale, which
does use a little more ink, because you'll
| | 02:52 | see different shades of gray and
so on for some of the background.
| | 02:56 | So it's totally up to you
how much you want to use.
| | 02:58 | I like Black and White when it comes to
printing out handouts that I'm going to
| | 03:02 | be giving to my audience members.
| | 03:04 | You can also choose whether or
not hidden slides will be printed.
| | 03:07 | We do have a hidden slide.
| | 03:09 | Do we want that included?
| | 03:10 | Well, if we do, we leave it checked.
| | 03:12 | If we don't, we'll deselect it, and now
our number is actually going to go down.
| | 03:16 | You could see the thumbnails
change here to skip over Slide2.
| | 03:20 | Let's go up here to Copies & Pages.
| | 03:22 | We'll just click that, and you can see there
are other categories to choose from here as well.
| | 03:27 | So if we go to Paper Type/Quality and
if you're going to be printing in Black
| | 03:31 | and White, you might want to set under
Paper, your Color to Grayscale, and your
| | 03:38 | Paper Type where it says Automatic,
you have a number of different options.
| | 03:42 | I have Inkjet paper.
| | 03:45 | And the Quality, you can see, you can
adjust this to a draft, all the way up to
| | 03:49 | maximum dots per inch.
| | 03:51 | Again, this will save you some ink if
you go to something like Fast Draft.
| | 03:55 | It's not going to be the best
quality, but your people - your audience -
| | 04:00 | they'll get the idea.
| | 04:01 | Go to Color Options.
| | 04:03 | You can also choose just to use the
black print cartridge if you're going to be
| | 04:06 | printing in Black and White.
| | 04:09 | When you're ready to print it, just
click the Print button and off go your
| | 04:12 | handouts, notes, or slides in a presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sending a slideshow to iPhoto| 00:01 | If you want to share your
presentation with someone so they can view your
| | 00:04 | slides - maybe they don't even have
PowerPoint, but they work on the Mac -
| | 00:08 | one option is to send
your presentation to iPhoto.
| | 00:12 | Each of the individual slides in your
presentation will then become a picture or
| | 00:16 | a photo that can be viewed using iPhoto.
| | 00:19 | Let's explore this option right
now, continuing to work with our
| | 00:21 | Sharing presentation.
| | 00:23 | We'll simply go up to File and then
down to Share. From the little side menu that
| | 00:28 | pops up, we can see Send to iPhoto.
| | 00:32 | The ellipses indicates there's going to
be some kind of window with some options
| | 00:35 | for us to select from, and sure
enough, there it is: Send to iPhoto.
| | 00:39 | A New Album will be created in
iPhoto, and the name of that album will
| | 00:44 | match your presentation,
| | 00:45 | in this case Sharing, whatever
number you're on, and the extension.
| | 00:49 | You can change this of course. And it
really doesn't make sense to have the
| | 00:52 | extension in there, so I'm going to
click at the end and backspace over it
| | 00:55 | using my Delete key.
| | 00:57 | You can do the same if you like. Call
it whatever you want, and then you can
| | 01:00 | select the Format that the pictures
will appear in. JPEG is the default; the
| | 01:04 | other option is PNG.
| | 01:08 | Then you can choose whether or not it's
going to be every slide or slides that
| | 01:11 | you have selected over
here in the Navigation pane.
| | 01:14 | Now, if you haven't selected slides, you'll
have to cancel this, go back, select them.
| | 01:18 | You can select a few using your Shift
key and your Command key or just simply
| | 01:23 | have them all converted to JPEGs to
be viewed in iPhoto with All selected.
| | 01:28 | When you're ready, click Send to iPhoto,
and then depending on the size of your
| | 01:32 | presentation, this can be very quick,
or it could take a while for each of the
| | 01:37 | individual slides to be created.
| | 01:39 | Here they are, in their
own album called Sharing3.
| | 01:43 | You can see, they're all selected here.
| | 01:45 | You can deselect them just by clicking.
And then if you wanted to view one as an
| | 01:49 | individual picture, you
could simply double-click it.
| | 01:51 | Let's double-click Slide 2 here.
| | 01:53 | You can see it looks exactly
like it did in PowerPoint. Perfect!
| | 01:58 | If you wanted to, you
could play this as a slideshow.
| | 02:01 | So let's just go back to our Sharing3
folder here, and let's click Slideshow.
| | 02:07 | Now, when you play this as a slideshow
in iPhoto, of course it's not going to
| | 02:11 | have all of the transitions and
effects that we saw in a PowerPoint
| | 02:16 | presentation, but you are able to choose
them, which ones you want to view, click
| | 02:20 | Play, and off goes your slideshow.
| | 02:23 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:28 | When you press Escape, you're back to iPhoto.
| | 02:31 | So some defaults happen there.
| | 02:32 | There are some special effects, not
the same ones you see in PowerPoint.
| | 02:35 | There may be some music
in the background as well.
| | 02:38 | That's all part of
playing a slideshow in iPhoto.
| | 02:42 | So when you need to share your
presentation with someone - maybe not
| | 02:45 | necessarily to work on the presentation in
PowerPoint, maybe they don't even have PowerPoint,
| | 02:50 | you just want them to view the slides -
| | 02:51 | if they're on the Mac, one option is
to send your presentation to iPhoto.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating PowerPoint pictures| 00:00 | Sending your presentation to iPhoto
converts the slides into pictures that can
| | 00:05 | be viewed using iPhoto, even
using iPhoto slideshow functionality.
| | 00:10 | But what if you want to share your
presentation in picture format with someone
| | 00:14 | who doesn't have a Mac and doesn't use iPhoto?
| | 00:16 | In that case, you can just simply
save it to a folder full of pictures, and
| | 00:20 | that's what we're going to do right now.
| | 00:21 | Still working with our Sharing presentation,
| | 00:24 | we'll go up to File. And instead of
going down to Share, you'll notice Save as
| | 00:28 | Pictures has an option all
by itself on the File menu,
| | 00:31 | so we'll select that.
| | 00:32 | Now, it's just a matter of giving it a name.
| | 00:35 | Notice the name is the same as the presentation,
| | 00:38 | in this case Sharing, and whatever
number you're using, I'm on Sharing4 here.
| | 00:42 | You can change the location.
| | 00:44 | So if you want to go to a different
place, like your Documents or maybe right to
| | 00:48 | the Desktop, that will make it easy to find.
| | 00:50 | You can choose the format for your pictures,
and this is just the Save As window of course.
| | 00:55 | You can go down to Format and choose any
Save As format, but notice that JPEG is
| | 00:59 | selected because we chose Save as
Pictures from the File menu, and there are
| | 01:03 | other picture formats below it as well.
| | 01:06 | So depending on who is going to be
viewing these and what they're going to be
| | 01:09 | viewing it with, you can
select the appropriate option.
| | 01:12 | JPEG is very popular.
| | 01:13 | That's why it's the default.
| | 01:14 | So we'll keep that one, and click Save.
| | 01:17 | Now, just like when we save to iPhoto,
each of the individual slides gets
| | 01:22 | saved as a picture.
| | 01:23 | We see this message at the end.
| | 01:24 | In this case, we're not taken to
iPhoto, just the message saying that a
| | 01:28 | Sharing4 folder was created on my Desktop,
and that's where I am going to find my pictures.
| | 01:34 | I can do that by clicking OK, and now all I
have to do is go to my desktop to view them.
| | 01:40 | I'm going to go to Finder, select the
Desktop, and there is my Sharing4 folder
| | 01:45 | right there. When I double
-click it to open it up,
| | 01:48 | I see slides, slide 1 through 8.
| | 01:51 | That's each of the slides in my presentation.
| | 01:53 | They're each a JPEG, and I can
change the way I'm viewing these.
| | 01:57 | For example, if I go to my View
buttons here in Finder - and I'm just going to
| | 02:01 | expand this window a little
bit to make it easier to see...
| | 02:04 | there we go - and I can move
through the various slides using my
| | 02:08 | Navigation buttons.
| | 02:10 | As you can see, they look just like
they did in PowerPoint, but they are
| | 02:14 | pictures of the slides, not slides
themselves that we use in a PowerPoint
| | 02:18 | presentation package.
| | 02:20 | So we'll close up Finder now and just
click anywhere in PowerPoint to go back.
| | 02:24 | So when you need to share your
slides with someone - they maybe don't use
| | 02:28 | PowerPoint, or you don't want them
using PowerPoint to make changes to your
| | 02:31 | slides - you can save them as pictures,
and whether they use a Mac and iPhoto or
| | 02:35 | not, they'll be able to view each of
the slides of your presentation in picture
| | 02:39 | format using whichever method they want.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a PowerPoint movie| 00:00 | When you want to share your
presentation with others and you don't want to have
| | 00:04 | to save it to individual photos to be
viewed in iPhoto or some other means,
| | 00:10 | another option is to save it as a movie.
| | 00:12 | The advantage to saving it as a movie
is they can view your presentation using
| | 00:16 | any timings you might have in
your slide and special effects;
| | 00:19 | we're going to look at those options
now with our Sharing presentation open.
| | 00:23 | We'll simply go up to the File menu,
and choose to save this as a movie.
| | 00:27 | It is an option that
appears right on the File menu,
| | 00:29 | so we don't have to go to Save
As and then find that format.
| | 00:33 | So we'll choose Save as
Movie. There is Save As.
| | 00:36 | You can see the name is going to be the same
as the name of your presentation, so Sharing.
| | 00:41 | You can change the location if you wanted to.
| | 00:43 | I'm going to change it to the Desktop,
keeping the same name, and we could just
| | 00:47 | simply click Save and accept all of the
default movie options. Or you can click
| | 00:51 | the Movie Options button to take a look at them.
| | 00:54 | For example, under Movie Settings,
here you'll see optimization is automatic.
| | 00:59 | You can change the format of the movie
to accommodate size, so optimize for size.
| | 01:05 | If you want to keep the size down,
the quality might not be as good.
| | 01:09 | If you really want smooth playback,
then the quality goes up a little bit, and
| | 01:13 | it will be a bigger file in the end;
same thing if you choose Quality.
| | 01:17 | Let's go to Smooth playback.
| | 01:19 | Now movie dimensions can also be altered here.
| | 01:21 | You'll see the default 640 x 480.
| | 01:23 | You can use the current screen size,
or a custom screen size as well.
| | 01:28 | I am going to leave it at 640 x 480 again.
| | 01:31 | These will affect the size of the
individual file that's created here.
| | 01:36 | Media Settings, you can see slide
transitions are by default going to follow the
| | 01:40 | Slide Show settings.
| | 01:42 | So if you have transitions and special
effects, you're going to see them in your movie.
| | 01:46 | Background Soundtrack,
| | 01:47 | if you wanted music, you could click here to
select a soundtrack or just leave it at None.
| | 01:53 | What happens at the end of the movie?
| | 01:54 | You can have it loop around and start
over if you want, show the movie player
| | 01:57 | controls so people can pause if they need
to and play and fast-forward and rewind.
| | 02:03 | Then these settings can be applied to
all new presentations or just to the
| | 02:07 | presentation you're working on.
| | 02:09 | We'll leave that selected and
click OK and then click Save.
| | 02:13 | So it just takes a moment - again,
depending on the number of slides in your
| | 02:18 | presentation - to create the movie version.
| | 02:20 | So let's go and see what that looks like.
| | 02:22 | We'll just minimize PowerPoint, and
there is our Sharing5 movie on the desktop.
| | 02:27 | Double-clicking it will automatically open,
| | 02:29 | in this case QuickTime
Player, to play the presentation.
| | 02:33 | You can see down below we've got the
needle showing us exactly how far along in
| | 02:37 | our presentation we are.
| | 02:39 | As we move through the movie, you're
going to see the different slides appearing
| | 02:43 | using transitional effects. There we go.
| | 02:46 | Now it may not look exactly like what you
see in your presentation, but it's close.
| | 02:51 | In this case it's kind of a fade,
and we don't see the exact same effect.
| | 02:56 | Now, you'll see also when it gets to
the end because of the option we selected,
| | 03:00 | it will automatically loop around and
start over again and play slide number 1.
| | 03:06 | Some of the timings are a little bit
different in this presentation, so we don't
| | 03:09 | see the slides for quite
as long at the end there.
| | 03:11 | They're 1 second. And back
it goes to the beginning.
| | 03:14 | Now the quality of your movie as well, if
you look at the slides in the graphics,
| | 03:18 | there might be some pixelation again,
| | 03:20 | you can adjust how you want to save
your end movie using some of those options
| | 03:25 | for Quality, if you want to optimize it that way.
| | 03:27 | Of course, you're going to
end up with a larger file size.
| | 03:31 | When you're done, you can use the
controls or just go up to QuickTime Player and
| | 03:36 | quit that, and go back to PowerPoint to
continue working with your presentation.
| | 03:42 | So it's an excellent option for sharing
your presentation with someone, allowing
| | 03:46 | them to see some of the effects and
not have to look at individual photos or
| | 03:50 | pictures representing your slides,
but just one file, which is a movie file.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a PDF presentation| 00:00 | When you want to be able to share
your presentation with almost anyone,
| | 00:04 | regardless of the program they're
using, and you want them to have a read-only
| | 00:08 | version of your presentation, an
excellent option is to save it to PDF,
| | 00:13 | Portable Document Format.
| | 00:15 | If they're on the PC, they can
use Adobe Reader, a free download.
| | 00:18 | If they are on the Mac, they can use
Preview to look at the various slides, which
| | 00:22 | are converted into pages in the PDF document.
| | 00:24 | We're going to do that now
with our sharing presentation.
| | 00:28 | And we'll go up to File, and you'll notice
Save As PDF does not appear in the File menu.
| | 00:33 | So we do need to click Save As and
change the Format from PowerPoint
| | 00:38 | Presentation to PDF.
| | 00:40 | Now we can choose a location.
The name is going to be the same as our
| | 00:44 | presentation, Sharing, and
a number right after it.
| | 00:48 | Let's change the location where it's
easy to find, like the Desktop, and we'll
| | 00:52 | just simply click Save.
| | 00:53 | There no other options to
choose from for saving to PDF.
| | 00:56 | It doesn't take long, depending
on the size of your presentation.
| | 01:00 | And eventually we end up with
a PDF version on our desktop.
| | 01:03 | So we'll minimize our presentation.
| | 01:05 | There it is, Sharing6.pdf for me.
| | 01:08 | I'll double-click it now, which
launches, on the Mac here, the Preview program
| | 01:13 | and in Preview you can see, I'm looking at page
1, which is my first slide in the presentation.
| | 01:18 | I have a Navigation Pane over here in
the sidebar, so I can click thumbnails to
| | 01:22 | go from page to page,
| | 01:25 | and they look exactly like they
did in the slideshow in PowerPoint.
| | 01:30 | Now you do not get all of those fancy
transitional and animation effects, but
| | 01:37 | you do get visual representations of
each of the slides in your presentation
| | 01:41 | that pretty much anyone can view, so
it makes it very easy to share your
| | 01:45 | presentation using PDF.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating custom slideshows| 00:00 | By far the most popular method for
sharing a presentation with others is to put
| | 00:04 | it up onscreen and have them view it.
| | 00:07 | Now, depending on the audience, you may want
to have different versions of your presentation.
| | 00:12 | For example, NewHire Orientation may
contain a number of slides that are
| | 00:16 | pertinent to maybe management
staff that would not relate to
| | 00:21 | non-management staff.
| | 00:22 | So you'll have slides in your
presentation that might be hidden away for a
| | 00:27 | non-management presentation and then shown
in the management version of the presentation.
| | 00:33 | These are called custom shows.
| | 00:34 | You don't have to create
copies of your presentation.
| | 00:37 | All you need to do is create a custom
version, and that's what we're going to do,
| | 00:40 | continuing to work with our
Sharing presentation here.
| | 00:43 | Notice, for example, we
have one hidden slide here.
| | 00:46 | If we wanted to unhide this slide, we
simply go to it, right-click or Ctrl+Click
| | 00:51 | and choose Hide Slide, which
currently has a check mark. This unhides it.
| | 00:56 | You could also access that by going to the
Slide Show tab and choosing the Hide Slide button.
| | 01:02 | However you do it, maybe you're
going to turn on certain slides for your
| | 01:06 | management team and turn some of them
off for your non-management employees;
| | 01:10 | instead of doing that, create a custom
version, and we can do that as well by
| | 01:15 | going to our Slide Show menu.
| | 01:18 | Let's go up here to Slide
Show and down to Custom Shows.
| | 01:21 | Here's where you're going to see existing shows.
| | 01:23 | If there aren't any, your only option
is to edit Custom Shows; let's do that.
| | 01:28 | The Custom Shows window opens up,
and there's nothing there, obviously.
| | 01:33 | We're going to create our first
new custom show. So we click New.
| | 01:38 | You'll see the slides over here on the
left-hand side, and we can add any slide
| | 01:42 | we want to the right-hand side to
create our custom show, but let's start with
| | 01:46 | the name at the top.
| | 01:47 | Custom Show 1 is what it
says. Let's do Managers.
| | 01:55 | In this case, we want them all
added over there to the right-hand side.
| | 01:59 | So I'll click the first one, hold down Shift,
click the last one, and add them, and click OK.
| | 02:04 | So now we've got a custom show called Managers.
| | 02:08 | Let's create another new
one now called Non Managers.
| | 02:19 | In this case, we want to
leave out a couple of slides.
| | 02:21 | So we're going to select the
first slide, and we'll add it.
| | 02:27 | Slide number 2 maybe also belongs and 3,
| | 02:30 | but then we'll skip 4, and we'll go
to 5, and we'll leave out the Product
| | 02:36 | Pricing, go to Sales
Results, and the Conclusion.
| | 02:40 | So that would be an example of maybe a version
of our show that we would show to non-managers.
| | 02:45 | When you click OK, you now have a
second version of your slide presentation.
| | 02:49 | Now, you can choose which one you want to show.
| | 02:52 | So let's start back at the beginning.
| | 02:53 | We'll click Close, we open up our
presentation called Sharing, and all we do now
| | 02:59 | to show the version that we want is to
go back up to the Slide Show menu, down
| | 03:04 | to Custom Shows. You'll see them
there now, including our Edit option.
| | 03:09 | Let's say we're going to be showing our
presentation in front of non-managers,
| | 03:13 | we'd go to Non Managers.
| | 03:15 | It starts our slideshow, and it's going
to skip over those slides that we chose
| | 03:19 | not to show to our non managers.
| | 03:23 | Of course, if there are slide timings,
they'll be used, all of the special
| | 03:25 | effects and everything.
| | 03:26 | You don't lose anything on the slides
that you chose to show as part of your
| | 03:29 | presentation, but there they go.
| | 03:33 | We'll just press Escape now
to return to our presentation.
| | 03:38 | So if you do plan on showing different
versions of one presentation to different
| | 03:42 | groups of people,
consider creating custom shows.
| | 03:45 | That way, you don't have to take up
extra space with different copies of your
| | 03:49 | presentation, and then trying to make
sure you open up the right copy of that
| | 03:52 | presentation for the right group
of people you're presenting to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Broadcasting a presentation over the web| 00:00 | When it's not possible to get your
audience all together in one room to share
| | 00:05 | your presentation with them, another
option is to save time and money by
| | 00:10 | presenting over the web.
| | 00:12 | It's is called broadcasting a presentation,
| | 00:14 | something you can do in PowerPoint 2011.
| | 00:15 | We're going to look at it right now,
using our Sharing presentation.
| | 00:20 | To broadcast over the web, you can
go to the Slide Show menu and select a
| | 00:24 | Broadcast Slide show, or click
the Slide Show tab on the Ribbon.
| | 00:28 | You'll see Broadcast Show over
in the Play Slide Show group.
| | 00:32 | When you click this button, a little
window opens up here with the Broadcast
| | 00:36 | Slide Show options, where
you can choose your service.
| | 00:38 | By default, it's going to be the PowerPoint
Broadcast Service, unless you sign up
| | 00:42 | for something else;
| | 00:43 | it'll be the only option here.
| | 00:45 | And when you click Connect, it may
take a moment, but it's going to connect
| | 00:49 | to the web service.
| | 00:51 | It's also going to take your
presentation and convert it into a web presentation
| | 00:55 | and change your view in
PowerPoint to the Broadcast view.
| | 00:59 | Then you'll have options for
inviting people to your presentation.
| | 01:03 | Now depending on the number of slides
in your presentation, this could take a
| | 01:06 | while to prepare the broadcast. Or if
you only have a few slides like we do
| | 01:10 | here in this presentation, it won't
take long at all before you're up and
| | 01:14 | running in Broadcast view. So here we go.
| | 01:20 | You can see in the background we are
in Broadcast view, and we can't actually
| | 01:23 | edit our presentation
while we are in Broadcast mode.
| | 01:27 | Over here, a little window
pops up with a broadcast Link.
| | 01:30 | This is the link people can
use to join your presentation.
| | 01:34 | And now you can send them that link
in an e-mail by clicking the button -
| | 01:38 | it's a great way to send out
invitations to people - or simply copy the link.
| | 01:42 | When you do that, it's copied to your
clipboard so you can paste it in a browser,
| | 01:47 | and then you can play the slideshow
when you're ready or simply close this up.
| | 01:52 | Let's say we go to Safari in a new
window, and we paste that URL up in the
| | 01:57 | address field, and press Return.
| | 02:00 | You'll notice something is happening here.
| | 02:02 | We are in the Microsoft
PowerPoint 2010 Broadcast.
| | 02:04 | We are waiting for the broadcast to begin.
| | 02:07 | So we will switch back over to PowerPoint now.
| | 02:09 | We're ready to play our slide show.
| | 02:13 | We can do that from the current
slide, or start at the beginning.
| | 02:17 | When we click From Start, we start the
broadcast. Now, we can Command+Tab over to
| | 02:23 | Safari to see what's happening.
| | 02:25 | Here we are; the broadcast has begun.
| | 02:27 | We are watching it in our browser now.
| | 02:29 | And this is the link that we
can send to people via e-mail.
| | 02:32 | They will simply click the link when it's
time and start watching the presentation.
| | 02:36 | So slide timings and that kind of
thing can be used in your presentation, or
| | 02:41 | you can be moving from one slide
to the next using mouse clicks.
| | 02:45 | People are going to sit here watching
your presentation as you do that.
| | 02:49 | So let's Command+Tab over to PowerPoint.
| | 02:52 | And we'll just move on to the next
slide. And we'll Command+Tab over to
| | 02:57 | Safari, and there we are.
| | 02:58 | We're on the next slide.
| | 02:59 | Let's see if we can pick up that
special effect in the transition.
| | 03:03 | So one click and then Command+Tab to move over.
| | 03:07 | If you're using slide timings, you have
to wait for those timings to take effect.
| | 03:11 | You want to get people enough time to
read what's on the slide before it moves
| | 03:15 | on to the next slide.
| | 03:17 | Another option for viewers
is to view this in fullscreen.
| | 03:20 | If they don't want to see all of their
browser options, they can click view in
| | 03:23 | full screen, and it reloads it. There we go.
| | 03:28 | Let's Command+Tab back to PowerPoint.
| | 03:31 | And of course, when you're done,
you can always press Escape.
| | 03:34 | It takes you back to your Normal view.
| | 03:40 | If we Command+Tab over to Safari, you can
see it's just showing us the last slide we saw.
| | 03:45 | So you can take a break as the presenter.
| | 03:48 | The last slide that was viewed will
stay there until you're ready to resume.
| | 03:53 | When we switch back to PowerPoint and end
the broadcast, then it changes for the viewer.
| | 03:57 | You have to confirm you're ready to end
the broadcast. Then you'll notice we're
| | 04:02 | no longer in Broadcast view in
PowerPoint, and when we Command+Tab back to
| | 04:05 | Safari, the broadcast is over,
and we can close up Safari.
| | 04:12 | So that's all there is to
broadcasting your presentation over the web.
| | 04:17 | If you don't need to get everybody
in the same location - and that's very
| | 04:21 | cost-effective to show your
presentation over the web - why not use the new
| | 04:25 | Broadcast feature here in PowerPoint 2011?
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Customizing Your Work EnvironmentChanging PowerPoint preferences| 00:00 | As you continue to work with PowerPoint
2011, you're going to notice there are
| | 00:04 | certain settings that
are set for you by default.
| | 00:07 | And if you find yourself changing
those settings on a regular basis, you
| | 00:11 | might want to consider changing them
permanently by accessing the PowerPoint Preferences.
| | 00:16 | We're going to take a look
at some of them right now.
| | 00:18 | It really doesn't matter what
presentation you have on your screen at this time;
| | 00:22 | you don't even need to have a presentation open.
| | 00:25 | We're going to work with customizing.
| | 00:26 | So we are going to go you to
PowerPoint and select Preferences.
| | 00:31 | You'll notice the number of
categories across the top.
| | 00:34 | With the General selected, you'll
see the General options down below.
| | 00:38 | And there is a couple of
things here that are important.
| | 00:40 | First of all, enabling macro virus
protection is important now with this new file format.
| | 00:46 | The extension PPTX that you see at the
end of the files you saved indicate this
| | 00:51 | is an XML-based format that we're
saving to that allow us for macros.
| | 00:55 | So sometimes macros are used in a
malicious way, and they can be hidden inside a
| | 01:00 | presentation using this format.
| | 01:02 | You'll want to enable the macro
virus protection if you consider this.
| | 01:06 | Also, when you go to open up your
presentations, you'll notice a certain number
| | 01:10 | of recently used documents or
presentations appear in the Open Recent section -
| | 01:16 | the default being 10 - so you can
bump that up or down as you need.
| | 01:20 | When we go to the View category
by clicking the View button,
| | 01:23 | down at the bottom here under the Slide
Show, there is one interesting one that
| | 01:27 | you might want to think about:
| | 01:28 | End with black slide.
| | 01:30 | If you're presenting in front of
groups, you know how quite often it, when
| | 01:33 | you hit the last slide,
| | 01:35 | if you accidentally go past that last
slide, it takes you back to Normal view,
| | 01:39 | and your audience can see all of
your slide thumbnails and all of your
| | 01:42 | settings, and so on.
| | 01:43 | So you might want to
consider using a black slide,
| | 01:46 | and that way everyone knows
that it's end of the presentation.
| | 01:49 | Simply check that box before continuing.
| | 01:53 | Under Edit, you'll see some things
such as drag-and-drop text editing.
| | 01:57 | This is something I like to keep on.
| | 02:00 | When selecting,
automatically select entire words.
| | 02:02 | This is something I like to turn off.
| | 02:04 | Sometimes you want to select a
part of a word and you can't.
| | 02:07 | As you start to drag across the word,
it automatically selects the entire word
| | 02:11 | for you, but you can turn it off from here.
| | 02:13 | Also, you'll notice the maximum number
of undos is defaulted to 20, and you can
| | 02:17 | change this by using the
arrows or typing in your value.
| | 02:21 | Under the Save, we see all of our
Save options, such as AutoRecover.
| | 02:25 | This is something we took a peek at earlier on.
| | 02:28 | But what's interesting here is if you
find that you're saving your presentations
| | 02:32 | back to an earlier format - maybe
you're collaborating with people who haven't
| | 02:35 | upgraded yet to the new PowerPoint -
| | 02:38 | you can change the default save format
from here back to the old PPT extension,
| | 02:43 | and that way you don't have to use Save As every
time you want to save it back to that version;
| | 02:48 | it will happen automatically. And then
on those rare occasions where you need to
| | 02:51 | save to the new format, you can do so
using Save As, just a little time saver.
| | 02:57 | The other thing we're going
to look at is Compatibility.
| | 03:00 | And here you can see documents are
checked automatically for compatibility.
| | 03:04 | That compatibility checker that pops
up with Save As is an automatic setting
| | 03:09 | that can be turned off if you don't
like using the Compatibility Report, but
| | 03:12 | it's an excellent tool for making
sure that your presentations will be
| | 03:16 | compatible with those other formats.
| | 03:19 | So we'll click OK to save our settings.
| | 03:21 | It takes us back to PowerPoint, and then
in the next movie, we'll take it a step
| | 03:25 | further by customizing your
user interface and the Ribbon.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing the Ribbon and toolbars| 00:00 | If you're new to PowerPoint 2011, by far
the biggest adjustment is the new user
| | 00:05 | interface, specifically the
Ribbon that appears across the top.
| | 00:09 | We have different categories, which are
indicated by the tabs, always giving you
| | 00:13 | similar functionality group together,
making them easier to find so you spend
| | 00:17 | less time looking for functionality
and more time actually doing your work.
| | 00:22 | Inside those tabs, you're going to see groups.
| | 00:24 | You'll see group titles across the top.
| | 00:26 | Sometimes, you'll even see extra
tabs appear and disappear, depending on
| | 00:30 | what you're working.
| | 00:31 | This is context-sensitive, so you always
have the tools you need when you need them.
| | 00:35 | But the Ribbon itself is customizable.
| | 00:38 | One simple thing we can do, if you want
to create a little extra room to work, is
| | 00:43 | to go over to the right-hand side and
just click the little button - it looks like
| | 00:46 | an arrow pointing up - to collapse the Ribbon.
| | 00:49 | You'll still see the tabs, and when
you need to go there, for example, if you
| | 00:52 | want to add a chart, click
the Chart tab, and there you go.
| | 00:55 | You've got your Chart options.
| | 00:57 | Go back into your slide and click
somewhere on the slide, for example.
| | 01:01 | You'll see those extra tabs appear.
And then when you go back to the tab and
| | 01:05 | click it, it collapses.
| | 01:07 | But if you like to see it always on
your screen, click that little arrow that's
| | 01:11 | now pointing down, and it
will always be expanded.
| | 01:14 | Let's just click off the slide.
And it really doesn't matter what
| | 01:17 | presentation you're working with at
this point, because we're going to go
| | 01:20 | into the Preferences.
| | 01:22 | Now, you'll notice in the very
far right, there is this little cog.
| | 01:25 | So you can set your Ribbon Preferences
and Tab order from here, or if you prefer,
| | 01:30 | go up to PowerPoint > Preferences.
You'll be taken to the PowerPoint Preferences
| | 01:35 | window where you left off last time
you used it, but there is a Ribbon button
| | 01:39 | here as well that you can select.
| | 01:41 | And here's where you're going to
see those defaults or Preferences.
| | 01:45 | For example, under General,
the Ribbon is turned on.
| | 01:48 | Whenever you launch
PowerPoint, you see the new Ribbon.
| | 01:50 | If you just don't like it, you can't get used
to it, you want to go back to the way it was,
| | 01:54 | turn it off. Click the check box,
click OK, and your Ribbon's gone.
| | 01:58 | You're working with a menu bar and a
toolbar, and that's very similar to
| | 02:03 | previous versions of PowerPoint.
| | 02:05 | But really, if you can get used to the
Ribbon, you're going to save yourself a
| | 02:08 | lot of time, just because
of the way it's laid out.
| | 02:11 | So let's go back to PowerPoint, then
Preferences, and we'll turn that Ribbon
| | 02:15 | back on, and just so we can see
it, let's click OK. There it is.
| | 02:20 | It's back, and this time we'll go up to
the far right-hand side of the Ribbon.
| | 02:24 | We'll click the little cog
to set our Ribbon Preferences.
| | 02:27 | You can see right at the
top, Ribbon Preferences.
| | 02:30 | We'll give it a click, and it takes
us right to our PowerPoint Preferences,
| | 02:33 | looking at the Ribbon
Preferences where we left off.
| | 02:38 | Now, the Ribbon itself, when it's
collapsed so you're just looking at the tabs,
| | 02:43 | will expand when you open up a
presentation because of this check box, but if
| | 02:47 | you don't like that feature, you
can turn it off; totally up to you.
| | 02:51 | And the little group titles that you
see inside, for example, with Charts
| | 02:54 | selected, we see Insert Chart - that's
a group title, Data is another, Chart
| | 03:00 | Quick Layouts another -
| | 03:01 | if you don't like those, you can hide
those. It gives you a little bit of extra space.
| | 03:05 | I don't mind them, so
I'm not going to hide them.
| | 03:08 | Next, under Customize is where we
start changing the look of our Ribbon.
| | 03:12 | Starting with the Appearance,
here you'll see the color, which is
| | 03:14 | PowerPoint Orange, but if you
don't like that, you can switch it to
| | 03:17 | Graphite, the only other option.
| | 03:20 | And then we get into the various tabs.
| | 03:22 | So, right at the beginning is the
Home tab, then Themes, then Tables.
| | 03:25 | That's the default order.
| | 03:27 | The Home tab will always be there.
| | 03:29 | You can't really adjust that.
| | 03:30 | Notice it's grayed out.
| | 03:32 | You can't select it.
| | 03:33 | You can't deselect the check box,
but you can with the others.
| | 03:37 | For example, if you slide down and you
decide, as a developer, you need those
| | 03:41 | Developer tools, you can
turn that on. Let's click OK.
| | 03:45 | You'll notice there is a new tab now,
the Developer tab, for doing things with
| | 03:49 | macros and editing code and so on.
| | 03:51 | We'll go back to the Home tab.
| | 03:53 | Let's go to PowerPoint and
Preferences. And the other thing you can do is
| | 04:01 | once you've chosen which ones you
want to show or hide, is reorder them by
| | 04:04 | clicking and dragging them.
| | 04:05 | For example, if you don't want Themes
showing up right after the Home tab - you'd
| | 04:09 | rather have Tables
because you go there more often -
| | 04:12 | you can just drag Themes by clicking,
dragging it down past Tables, over Chart
| | 04:17 | let's say, and let go.
| | 04:19 | Now you've got a reorder.
| | 04:20 | It's going to be Tables, Charts, then
Themes. Click OK to see that change.
| | 04:25 | So you can totally customize
the order of your Ribbon tabs.
| | 04:31 | Let's go back now to the
cog on the right-hand side.
| | 04:33 | We'll select it and choose
Customize Ribbon Tab Order.
| | 04:37 | When we do that, this is another way.
| | 04:40 | You'll notice that each of the tabs now
appears with a little X next to it, so
| | 04:45 | we can turn them off if we don't need them.
| | 04:47 | Let's turn off the Developer tab by
clicking the X. It's gone. And if you want
| | 04:50 | to reorder things like bringing Themes
back, just click and drag it next to the
| | 04:55 | Home tab, and that's another
option for manipulating your Ribbon.
| | 04:59 | When you're done, you can click the Done
button. And at anytime, if you want to
| | 05:03 | go back to the defaults, you can click
Reset as well, and it will reset things
| | 05:07 | and close it up, so you're
back to working with the Ribbon.
| | 05:10 | So, although the Ribbon is new and it's
laid out in a way to make it easier for
| | 05:15 | you to find commands and to
save you some time and effort,
| | 05:19 | it's totally customizable, so you
can make it work the way you want.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | Well, congratulations!
| | 00:01 | You've reached the end of Microsoft
PowerPoint 2011 Essential Training.
| | 00:06 | You should now be feeling
comfortable with the many powerful features and
| | 00:09 | functions of PowerPoint 2011, and
ready to start creating your own
| | 00:13 | stunning presentations.
| | 00:15 | This is David Rivers, thanking you for
watching, and I hope to see you again in
| | 00:19 | another title from lynda.com.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
